JANUARY 1991 i NGWLMS ILSP

NEXT GENERATION WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENT SYSTEM

(NGWLMS)

SITE DESIGN, PREPARATION, AND INSTALLATION

MANUAL

January 1991

U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration

National Ocean Service

Office of Oceanography and Marine Assessment

Rockville, MD
JANUARY 1991 ii NGWLMS ILSP

Prepared by Richard F. Edwing

Civil Engineer

Sea and Estuarine Acquisition Unit

Sea and Lake Measurement Section

Sea and Lake Levels Branch

This manual supercedes prior editions dated: July 1989
iii

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Acronyms ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... xiii

1 INTRODUCTION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 1

1.1 BACKGROUND ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 1

1.2 PURPOSE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 1

2 SITE DESIGN ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 5

2.1 OFFICE INFORMATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 5

2.2 SITE RECONNAISSANCE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 6

2.3 DESIGN PARAMETERS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7

2.3.1 INSTRUMENT SHELTER ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 7

2.3.2 PROTECTIVE WELL ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 8

2.3.2-A Protective well location ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 9

2.3.2-B Protective well elevation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 9

2.3.2-C Protective well thermistors ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 13

2.3.3 BACKUP PRESSURE SENSOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.3.3-A Direct (in water) measurement configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

2.3.3-B Indirect (out of water) measurement configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

2.3.3-C Junction box ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 14

2.3.4 ANTENNA ASSEMBLY ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 14

2.3.5 SOLAR PANELS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 15

2.3.6 ANCILLARY SENSORS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 16

2.3.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 16

2.3.7-A Marine fouling ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 16

2.3.7-B Currents and waves ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 17

2.3.7-C Other ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 17

2.4 DESIGN DATA DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 17

3 SITE PREPARATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 19

3.1 INSTRUMENT SHELTER ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 19

3.2 PROTECTIVE WELL ASSEMBLY ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 20

3.3 TOP HAT ASSEMBLY ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 21

3.4 ACOUSTIC SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

3.5 ORIFICE ASSEMBLY ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 22

3.6 BACKUP PRESSURE SENSOR ASSEMBLY ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 22

3.7 ANTENNA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 23

3.8 CONDUIT ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 23

3.9 SENSOR REFERENCE MARK ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 24

3.9.1 PERMANENT SRM ESTABLISHMENT CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

3.9.2 TEMPORARY SRM ESTABLISHMENT CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
iv

4 FIELD UNIT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION AND INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

4.1 FIELD UNIT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 25

4.1.1 ACOUSTIC SENSOR SOUNDING TUBE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

4.1.1-A Computing the sounding tube assembly length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

4.1.1-B Constructing the sounding tube assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

4.1.1-C Testing the acoustic sensor/sounding tube assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 29

4.1.1-D Testing the two temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

4.1.1-E Attaching the two temperature sensors and bails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

4.1.1-F Mounting the assembly in the protective well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30

4.1.1-G Running the sensor cables to the 9000 RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

4.1.1-H Documentation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 31

4.1.2 BACKUP WATER LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

4.1.2-A Testing the backup pressure and temperature sensors . . . . . . . . . . 31

4.1.2-B Direct (in water) installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.1.2-C Indirect (out of water) installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

4.1.2-D Junction box installation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 32

4.1.2-E Running the Alpha cable to the 8200 data recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

4.1.3 LEVELING TO THE SENSORS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 34

4.1.3-A Leveling to the acoustic sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

4.1.3-B Leveling procedures ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 35

4.1.4 8200 DATA RECORDER ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 40

4.1.4-A Mounting the 8200 data recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

4.1.4-B Connecting the sensors alpha cable and the 8200/9000

 communications cable ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 40

4.1.4-C Installing the batteries ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 41

4.1.4-D Documentation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 41

4.1.5 GOES FLAT PLATE ANTENNA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 41

4.1.5-A Mounting the antenna ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 41

4.1.5-B Running the cable to the 9000 RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

4.1.5-C Testing the antenna cable ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 42

4.1.5-D Documentation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 42

4.1.6 SOLAR PANELS (OPTIONAL) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 42

4.1.6-A Assembling the panel(s) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 43

4.1.6-B Mounting the panels(s) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 43

4.1.6-C Connecting the cable(s) ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 43

4.1.7 9000 RTU ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 44

4.1.7-A Mounting the 9000 RTU ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 44

4.1.7-B Connecting sensor cables ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 45

4.1.7-C Connecting communication cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

4.1.7-D Connecting optional solar panel cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

4.1.7-E Connecting the ground ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 47

4.1.7-F Installing the battery ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 47

4.1.7-G Documentation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 47
v

4.2 SYSTEM INITIALIZATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 48

4.2.1 8200 DATA RECORDER INITIALIZATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

4.2.1-A Setting time and date ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 48

4.2.1-B Verifying system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

4.2.1-C Verifying sensors operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

4.2.1-D Sealing the unit ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 53

4.2.2 9000 RTU INITIALIZATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 53

4.2.2-A Power up the unit ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 54

4.2.2-B Interrogate the 9000 RTU with a laptop PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

4.2.2-C Set time and date ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 55

4.2.2-D Enter/verify system configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.2.2-E Enable appropriate sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

4.2.2-F Enter/verify associated sensor coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

4.2.2-G Test sensor operation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 57

4.2.2-H Test transmission power ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 58

4.2.2-I Enable GOES transmission ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 58

4.2.2-J Final check/logout ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 59

4.2.2-K Documentation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 59

4.2.2-L Seal unit with desiccant enclosed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4.2.3 FIELD UNIT OPERATIONAL CHECK ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 60

4.2.4 FIELD UNIT GRAPHICS SOFTWARE PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

4.2.4-A Support requirements ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 64

4.2.4-B Program operation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 65

4.3 NONSTANDARD 9000 RTU CONFIGURATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.3.1 TSUNAMI WARNING SYSTEM OUTPUT DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.3.1-A Requirements and installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

4.3.1-B Initialization ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 68

4.3.2 EXTERNAL OUTPUT DISPLAY DEVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

4.3.2-A Installing the LCD panel ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 69

4.3.2-B Initializing the LCD panel ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 69

4.3.3 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER PRIMARY WATER LEVEL SENSOR . . . . . . . . . 70

4.3.3-A Site preparation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 71

4.3.3-B Installation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 72

4.3.3-C Initiliazation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 72

4.3.4 CELLULAR TELEPHONE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 73

4.3.5 RADIO COMMUNICATIONS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 73
vi

5 ANCILLARY SENSORS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 75

5.1 WIND SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 76

5.1.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 76

5.1.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 77

5.1.3 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 78

5.2 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 78

5.2.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 78

5.2.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 78

5.2.3 CALIBRATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 80

5.2.4 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 80

5.3 AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 80

5.3.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 80

5.3.2 CALIBRATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 80

5.3.3 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 81

5.3.4 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 81

5.4 SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 81

5.4.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 81

5.4.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 81

5.4.3 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 82

5.5 DEWPOINT SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 82

5.5.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 82

5.5.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 82

5.5.3 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 82

5.6 RAINFALL SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 82

5.6.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 82

5.6.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 82

5.6.3 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 82

5.7 WATER CURRENT SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 83

5.7.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 83

5.7.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 83

5.7.3 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 83

5.8 WATER CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 83

5.8.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 83

5.8.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 84

5.8.3 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 84

5.9 WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 85

5.9.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 85

5.9.2 CALIBRATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 85

5.9.3 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 85

5.9.4 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 86
vii

5.10 WATER PRESSURE (PAROSCIENTIFIC) SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

5.10.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 86

5.10.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 86

5.10.3 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 87

5.11 ANALOG 1, 2 AND FREQUENCY 1, 2 SENSORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

5.11.1 SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 87

5.11.2 INSTALLATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 87

5.11.3 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 87

5.12 METEOROLOGICAL TOWERS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 87

5.12.1 STEEL TOWER SITING CRITERIA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 88

5.12.2 FIBERGLASS TOWER SITING CRITERIA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

6. SITE DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 89

6.1 NGWLMS SITE REPORT ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 89

6.2 NGWLMS WELL/SOUNDING TUBE WORKSHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

6.3 SENSOR TEST WORKSHEET ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 97

6.4 9000 RTU LOG BOOK ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 97

6.5 SOFTWARE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 97

REFERENCES ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 99
viii

APPENDICES

APPENDIX A NGWLMS COMPONENTS LIST ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 101

A.1 MANUFACTURER PROVIDED COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

A.1.1 9000 REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT (RTU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

A.1.2 WATER LEVEL SENSORS AND ANCILLARY COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

A.1.3 SATELLITE ANTENNA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 102

A.2 AUXILARY COMPONENTS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 103

A.2.1 FIELD UNIT ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 103

A.2.2 PROTECTIVE WELL ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 103

A.2.3 SOUNDING TUBE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 103

A.2.4 BACKUP PRESSURE SENSOR ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

A.2.5 ANTENNA MOUNT ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 103

A.2.6 CONDUIT ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 103

APPENDIX B SITE PREPARATION TOOL AND EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

APPENDIX C LIGHTNING PROTECTION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 109

C.1 BACKGROUND ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 109

C.2 SITE EVALUATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 109

C.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

APPENDIX D COEFFICIENT "2A": PRIMARY BENCH MARK ABOVE STATION DATUM OF

TABULATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 113

APPENDIX E NGWLMS ANCILLARY SENSOR MANUFACTURER INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

E.1 WIND SENSOR ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 119

E.1.1 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 121

E.1.2 MAIN HOUSING TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

E.1.3 CABLE WIRING DIAGRAM ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 129

E.1.4 GENERAL ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 131

E.1.5 POTENTIOMETER DIAGRAM ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 133

E.1.6 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 135

E.2 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 137

E.2.1 SPECIFICATION SHEET ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 139

E.2.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 141

E.3 AIR TEMPERATURE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 145

E.3.1 THERMISTOR/CABLE DIAGRAM ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 147

E.3.2 THERMISTOR SPECIFICATION SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

E.3.3 GILL MULTI-PLATE RADIATION SHIELD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

E.4 SOLAR RADIATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . RESERVED

E.5 DEWPOINT ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . RESERVED

E.6 RAINFALL ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... RESERVED

E.7 WATER CURRENT ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . RESERVED
ix

E.8 WATER CONDUCTIVITY ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 153

E.8.1 SPECIFICATION SHEET ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 155

E.8.2 CARE AND CLEANING OF CONDUCTIVITY CELLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

E.8.3 DIASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 159

E.8.4 HOOKUP INSTRUCTIONS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 161

E.9 WATER TEMPERATURE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 163

E.9.1 THERMISTOR/CABLE DIAGRAM ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 165

E.9.2 THERMISTOR SPECIFICATION SHEET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

E.10 WATER PRESSURE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 169

E.10.1 SPECIFICATION SHEET ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 171

E.11 ANALOG/FREQUENCY DEVICES ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . RESERVED

E.12 METEOROLOGIAL TOWERS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 175

E.12.1 BRACKETED STEEL TOWER ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 177

E.12.1.1 SPECIFICATION SHEET ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 177

E.12.1.2 ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

E.12.1.3 TOWER SECTION DIAGRAM ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 185

E.12.1.4 BASEPLATE DIAGRAM ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 187

E.12.1.5 PARTS LIST ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 189

E.12.1.6 WIND LOAD DIAGRAMS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 191

E.12.2 FIBERGLASS POLE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 197

E.12.2.1 SPECIFICATION SHEETS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 199

E.12.2.2 TECHNICAL DATA ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 205

APPENDIX F NGWLMS ANNUAL INSPECTION PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

F.1 LEVELS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 209

F.2 PROTECTIVE WELL ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 209

F.3 ACOUSTIC SENSOR AND SOUNDING TUBE ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 210

F.4 9000 RTU ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 210

F.5 GOES ANTENNA/SOLAR PANELS ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 212

F.6 BACKUP SENSOR ASSEMBLY ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 212

F.7 ANCILLARY SENSORS/TOWER ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 212

F.8 CONDUIT ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 213

F.9 UTILITIES ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 213

F.10 DOCUMENTATION ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 213

F.11 NGWLMS ANNUAL INSPECTION SPARE PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
x

FIGURES

Figure 1-1 Typical NGWLMS Site ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 2

Figure 1-2 Standard NGWLMS Field Unit Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Figure 2-1 Primary Water Level Sensor Protective Well Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Figure 3-1 Protective Well Configuration ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 20

Figure 3-2 Top Hat Assembly ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 21

Figure 3-3 Orifice Assembly ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 22

Figure 4-1 Backup Sensor Mounting Board ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 32

Figure 4-2 Junction Box Terminal Block Connections for Druck® Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Figure 4-3 Junction Box Terminal Block Connections for IMO® Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33

Figure 4-4 Leveling Fixture in Use ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 35

Figure 4-5 Leveling Fixture Close Up ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 35

Figure 4-6A Leveling Fixture Level Sheet Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Figure 4-6B Downshot Leveling Fixture Level Sheet Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Figure 4-6C Leveling Fixture Abstract Example ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 39

Figure 4-7 Alpha Cable To 8200 Data Recorder Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Figure 4-8 Solar Panel Cable To 8200 Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 4-9 Aquatrak®/Air Temperature Sensor Cables To 9000 Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . 45

Figure 4-10 8200 Data Recorder Communications Cable To 9000 Termination Board . . . . . . . . . 46

Figure 4-11 Telephone Cable To 9000 Termination Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Figure 4-12 Solar Panel Cable To 9000 RTU Step Down Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Figure 4-13 Conceptual Representation of Acoustic Sensor Water Level Measurement, Site

Datum, and Coefficients ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 57

Figure 4-14 NESDIS Data Retrieval Program Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Figure 4-15 NGWLMS Transmission Block ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 61

Figure 4-16 Primary Water Level Data ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 62

Figure 4-17 Backup Water Level Data ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 62

Figure 4-18 Redundant Water Level Data ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 63

Figure 4-19 Ancillary Data ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 63

Figure 4-20 Configuration Data ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 63

Figure 4-21 TIDES ABC Main Menu ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 66

Figure 4-22 Computer to Analog Module to 9000 RTU Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Figure 4-23 LCD Display Cable to 9000 RTU ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 69

Figure 4-24 Paroscientific® Cable to 9000 RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Figure 4-25 Paroscientific® Temperature Sensor Cable to 9000 RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Figure 5-1 Wind Sensor Cable to 9000 RTU ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 77

Figure 5-2 Barometric Sensor Installation ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 78

Figure 5-3 Barometric Sensor Cable to 9000 RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Figure 5-4 Air Temperature Cable to 9000 RTU ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 81

Figure 5-5 Water Conductivity Sensor Cable to 9000 RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Figure 5-6 Water Temperature Cable to 9000 RTU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Figure 6-1 NGWLMS Site Report Form ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 90

Figure 6-2 NGWLMS Well/Sounding Tube Worksheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Figure 6-3 NGWLMS Well/Sounding Tube Worksheet Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Figure 6-4 Sensor Test Worksheet ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 98

Figure C-1 Lightning Protection Risk Assessment Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
xi

TABLES

Table 1 Recommended Reconnaissance Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Table 2 Mean Wave Height at Coastal Localities of the Conterminous United States . . . 12

Table 3 Marine Fouling Scale ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 16

Table 4 Protective Well Requirements Summary ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 21

Table 5 Aquatrak® Installation Kit Parts List ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... 28

Table 6 Solar Panel Tilt Angles ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . 43

Table 7 Ancillary Sensors ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... . . 75
xii
xiii

ACRONYMS

AC - Alternating current

ADR - Analog-to-digital recorder

COE - Corps of Engineers

DC - Direct current

ETG - Electric tape gage

GOES - Geostationary Operational Environmental Satellite

GT - Great diurnal range

MHHW - Mean higher high water

MLLW - Mean lower low water

NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association

NGWLMS - Next Generation Water Level Measurement System

NOAA - National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration

NOS - National Ocean Service

NWLON - National Water Level Observation Network

NWS - National Weather Service

PBM - Primary bench mark

PVC - Polyvinyl chloride

RTU - Remote terminal unit

SRM - Sensor reference mark

TBM - Temporary bench mark
xiv
JANUARY 1991 1 NGWLMS ILSP

1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 BACKGROUND

The Sea and Lake Levels Branch, of the Office of Oceanography and Marine Assessment

(OMA), is responsible for the management of a national water level measurement program.

The foundation of this program is the operation and maintenance of the National Water

Level Observation Network (NWLON), a network of approximately 200 continuously

operating data collection stations in the U.S. coastal oceans, the Great Lakes and

connecting waterways, and in U.S. Trust Territories and Possessions. The data and

information from this network represent one of the most unique and valuable geophysical

data sets available. The network provides for the determination and maintenance of

vertical reference datums used for surveying and mapping, dredging, coastal construction,

water level regulation, marine boundary determinations, tide prediction, and for

determination of long term water level variations (e.g. trends). The station platforms and

telemetered data are used to support major U.S. Government programs such as the NWS

Tsunami Warning System, the NWS storm surge monitoring programs, the U.S. Army

Corps of Engineers (COE) national dredging program, the COE/Canadian Great Lakes

regulation program, and the NOAA Climate and Global Change Program.

The Next Generation Water Level Measurement System (NGWLMS) field unit is a stand

alone data acquisition and data transmission unit. The field unit includes a data collection

platform with an acoustic water level measurement sensor, and a backup system with a

pressure sensor. The field unit can support up to 11 additional ancillary sensors. The

primary link by which data are transmitted from the field unit to NOS for data processing

and analysis is once every three hours via Geostationary Operational Environmental

Satellite (GOES). Data may also be transmitted by line of sight radio, over telephone lines

where available, or downloaded by personal computer on site.

The implementation of the NGWLMS in the NWLON and other data collection program

networks, represents a fundamental change in how the Branch accomplishes its functions.

The NGWLMS, when fully implemented, replaces the predecessor technologies for data

collection, data transmission, data quality control, data processing and analysis, data

dissemination, and data base management with state-of-the-art systems.

1.2 PURPOSE

This document contains the procedures and guidelines required to establish a standard

NGWLMS site. This document focuses mainly on establishing a NGWLMS at existing

NWLON locations, however, the procedures and guidelines can be easily adapted to new

locations.
JANUARY 1991 2 NGWLMS ILSP

Figure 1-1

Typical NGWLMS Site

A standard NGWLMS site (see Figure 1-1) is defined as encompassing the following; 

! Support structure (pier, platform, wharf, etc.).

! Instrument shelter.

! Standard production field unit with primary and backup water level sensors

(see Figure 1-2).

! Auxiliary support components (protective well, brackets, etc.).

! Utilities.

! Bench mark network. 

A NGWLMS site is established in three phases. First, the NGWLMS site must be

designed. This can be done primarily at the office if enough information is available, but

a site reconnaissance is usually necessary and recommended. Chapter 2 addresses

designing the NGWLMS installation.

Next, the NGWLMS site must be prepared before the actual instrumentation is installed.

This may include obtaining permission, constructing an instrument shelter, installing

auxiliary support components, arranging for utility service, etc.. This is typically the most

difficult part. Chapter 3 addresses site preparation.

 

Third, the NGWLMS field unit and any ancillary sensors are installed and initialized. The

NGWLMS field unit is the instrumentation (see Appendix A) provided by the manufacturer.

Auxilary components provided are the commercially available or government designed and

fabricated components required to install the field unit. Chapter 4 addresses installing the

NGWLMS field unit and initializing the system.
JANUARY 1991 3 NGWLMS ILSP

Insert Figure 1-2
JANUARY 1991 4 NGWLMS ILSP

The NGWLMS field unit can support up to eleven ancillary sensors in addition to the

standard two water level sensors. Site design/preparation guidelines and installation

procedures are addressed in Chapter 5. 

The three phases may be accomplished in rapid succession or may be separated by long

time periods. It is essential that proper documentation be maintained throughout all three

phases to ensure that no critical information is lost along the way. Chapter 6 addresses

documentation requirements and provides standard forms. 

Appendices provide information, drawings, and specifications.

Units of measure provided in the manual are primarily in metric with English units following

in parentheses. The English units are rounded and are not the precise metric equivalent.

Mention of trade names or commericial products does not constitute NOS endorsement

or recommendation for use.
JANUARY 1991 5 NGWLMS ILSP

2 SITE DESIGN

The proper design of a NGWLMS site is critical to ensuring the collection of valid,

high quality data. If the site is not designed or configured in accordance with the

requirements, the data may be biased or degraded in some manner. Proper design

will also ensure a smooth, efficient, installation. The designer must not only be

aware of the requirements, but must understand the reasons behind them.

Situations will arise where some of the requirements may conflict with other, and the

designer must make a choice. The best choice can only be made if the underlying

reasons and consequences are well understood.

2.1 OFFICE INFORMATION

The first step in designing a NGWLMS site is to gather the relevant information. In

most cases, the site is an existing or historic water level station, and office files can

be consulted for much of the information. Program requirements may also provide

some direction. Assemble as much of the following information as possible. 

! Tidal datums and bench mark elevations.

! Support structure and harbor bottom elevations.

! Support structure plan and sun transit.

! Environmental data.

! Instrument shelter and utilities description.

! GOES transmission information (azimuth and elevation).

! Ancillary sensor(s) requirements.

Tidal datums are required to determine the length and elevation of the protective

well. Observed highest/lowest water levels shall be used at long term control

stations. Estimated highest/lowest water levels shall be used at short term stations.

Ensure that the tidal datums are based on the 1960-78 tidal epoch. Use of this

information is discussed in detail in Section 2.3.2.

Support structure and harbor bottom elevations are required as they may impose

physical constraints on the protective well and backup sensor mounting board

assembly elevations and lengths. These elevations typically have been documented

for existing NWLON stations and can be determined at historic sites through levels

to the bench mark network. 

Information on the support structure's orientation and the path of the sun's transit is

critical for locating a thermally acceptable site for the protective well. 

Descriptions of the instrument shelter and utilities are typically available for NWLON

sites and can be used to determine if adequate space and utilities exist for the

NGWLMS field units. The GOES satellite antenna azimuth and elevation angles are

required to select an antenna site free of obstructions that may interfere with the

transmission. GOES satellite azimuths are referenced in true degrees. If a compass

is used to position the antenna, the local magnetic declination must be applied.
JANUARY 1991 6 NGWLMS ILSP

Requirements for ancillary sensors should be determined in advance to allow

adequate lead time for site preparation design and installation.

Site specific environmental data, particularly on wave climate, is important. Wave

data are used in determining well length and elevation. Other types of

environmental data may also be useful for design or validation processes. 

A preliminary design can usually be done in the office. One, or several options,

should be planned for so that potential problem areas can be identified and

investigated. Application of the office information, as well as information derived

from a reconnaissance, is discussed in detail in the following sections as it is

important to understand the applications when assembling the information. 

2.2 SITE RECONNAISSANCE

The best and most thorough method of assembling all the design information

required is a reconnaissance. The primary objective of the reconnaissance is to

determine the optimal location and configuration for the 9000 Remote Terminal Unit

(RTU), 8200 data recorder, antenna, sensors, and support components. The

reconnaissance consists of personnel visiting the site sufficiently far in advance of

site preparation to: 

! Locate an acceptable site.

! Obtain measurements and information necessary to design the station.

! Arrange for any permits/license agreements required.

! Arrange for utilities.

! Prepare a cost estimate and work schedule.

! Allow time for the procurement and fabrication of special support

components (if necessary). 

Property owners should be contacted well in advance to obtain oral or written

permission to use or modify the site. An advance letter of permission, permit,

security clearance, or some other written instrument may be required by the owner.

A license agreement may have to be executed before any work can be done. Even

if the site is an existing NWLON station, some advance notice may be required or

appreciated by the owner. 

Accurate measurements and information can best be obtained onsite. The locale

can be investigated to determine which particular site will best accommodate the

preliminary design and all the other NGWLMS site requirements. Any special

installation requirements, such as explosion proof conduit on fuel piers, can also be

determined through discussions with local authorities. 

Once a design is finalized, a cost estimate and schedule can be determined. The

costs and schedule can vary significantly depending upon how extensive the site

preparation work is.

The NGWLMS site establishment schedule must take into account the design and

procurement/fabrication of any special support components needed.
JANUARY 1991 7 NGWLMS ILSP

Camera/Videotape Recorder Published Bench Mark Sheet

Steel tape Sample License Agreement 

Weighted tape Engineering sketch pad 

Inclinometer Plumb bob 

Compass Chart section

NGWLMS Well/Sounding Tube Worksheet 

Table 1

Recommended Reconnaissance Equipment

Equipment and worksheets recommended for use during the site reconnaissance

are listed in Table 1. Photographs and/or videotaping are recommended. 

2.3 DESIGN PARAMETERS

 

There are five main areas to consider when designing the NGWLMS site; 

! The instrument shelter.

! The protective well.

! The backup sensor.

! The antenna.

! Ancillary sensors

Each area has specific requirements which must be considered. The objective is to

satisfy every requirement for each area, however, this may not always be possible.

Guidance will be provided as to which requirements have a higher priority than

others. 

Appendix A contains specifications for the field unit and commercially available or

government designed and fabricated auxilary components. Appendix A should be

consulted for dimensions, cable lengths, material types, and any other information

that may be required for the reconnaissance (and site preparation). 

 

2.3.1 INSTRUMENT SHELTER

 

An instrument shelter is required to house the instrumentation, although the system

is protected against the environment and vandalism by the NEMA enclosures. The

shelter provides additional protection against the environment and vandalism, a

sheltered work environment for field personnel, and utilities service. The instrument

shelter can be a small room or area in a an existing structure or a wood frame,

masonary, or fiberglass building specifically designed, built, or purchased for a water

level shelter.

Antenna and sensor distances from the 9000 RTU and 8200 data recorder are

constrained by the standard cable lengths, although some cables can be lengthened

within certain limitations. Utilities (power and telephone) should be nearby or easily

accessible. Solar panels should be utilized in appropriate areas. If utilities are not

available, cost estimates for supplying the utilities shall be obtained. 
JANUARY 1991 8 NGWLMS ILSP

The desired mounting configuration for the NEMA enclosures is on the wall, although

the enclosures can stand on a table or the floor, if adequate wall space is not

available. The NEMA enclosures shall be mounted so that there is sufficient

clearance in front and to the sides for installation and maintenance access. Ample

clearance on the cable entry side of the enclosures is particularly advised. The

distance the two enclosures can separated is limited by a 3 m (10 ft) communication

cable length.

Grounding, either by single point AC or by a localized grounding system is required.

Guidelines for grounding are provided in Section 3.1.

2.3.2 PROTECTIVE WELL

The protective well is comprised of four

functional assemblies; the top hat, the

acoustic sensor mounting plate, the well,

and the orifice assemblies. 

! The top hat assembly is defined as

the cap, slip flange, short pipe

section, vent screens, and lock.

! The acoustic sensor mounting plate

assembly is defined as the two piece

anodized aluminum plate, mounting

clamp, and associated hardware. 

! The well assembly is a white, 15 cm

(6 inch) diameter schedule 80 PVC

pipe with vent holes. Larger

diameter or different materials may

be used if already suitably installed.

The well assembly shall have vent

hole screens, a copper sheet insert,

and a flange at each end.

Slip-to-slip couplers may be required

for joining sections.

! The orifice assembly is a threaded

flange and double cone orifice with

parallel plates. A slip-to-thread

coupler with double cone orifice and

shroud section may be used in areas

where bottom support for the well is

required or physical constraints

prevent the use of parallel plates. 

Figure 2-1

Primary Water Level Sensor

Protective Well Configuration
JANUARY 1991 9 NGWLMS ILSP

The design of the protective well is probably the most complex part of the installation.

There are many variables to consider, some of which may conflict with each other.

The well design is discussed in two parts; location and elevation. Thermistor

elevations are not a part of the well location and elevation design process, but should

be determined at this time. They are discussed under a third section.

 

2.3.2-A Protective well location

The well location is primarily constrained by the availability of support structures to

which braces can be fastened. This consideration is no different than with analog-todigital (ADR) stilling wells. The protective well shall be plumb to within 1 cm/m (1/8

inch/ft) and adequately braced to withstand expected local sea state conditions. The

location can be either inside or outside (see next paragraph for considerations) of the

instrument shelter, but distance from the 9000 RTU is limited by the standard 15 m (50

ft) sensor cable lengths. Longer sensor cables can be provided up to 30 m (100 ft),

but distances greater than this shall be avoided, and require prior approval from

headquarters.

The thermal environment of the above water portion of the well must be carefully

considered. The upper 1.1 m (3.6 ft) of the well, which houses the calibration (cal)

tube section, must be exposed to the same temperature regime that the rest of the

above water well is. Since the transducer calibrates by calculating the speed of

sound, based on the temperature regime in the cal tube, a much different temperature

regime below will affect the accuracy. The two thermistors placed in the well are to

measure any temperature differential. The temperature data can then be used, if

necessary, to correct the water level data; but, configurations allowing large

differentials are to be avoided. Every reasonable effort must be made to avoid

temperature differentials large enough to necessitate correcting the raw water level

data. 

Avoid the configuration where the top 1.1 m (3.6 ft) of the well extends into a heated

instrument shelter while the rest of the well passes through colder air under the pier.

Also avoid the configuration where a well is installed outside of an instrument shelter

and is oriented alongside a pier, or other structure, so that as the sun transits the sky,

the upper section of well is in direct sunlight, while the lower section is shaded. Both

can cause undesirable temperature differentials as discussed above.

Other well location considerations are accessibility of the well and security. The well

should not be so difficult to access that maintenance is arduous. In areas where

vandalism may be a problem, exposure of the well to public access should be

avoided.

2.3.2-B Protective well elevation

 

Complex requirements govern the upper and lower well elevations. The highest/lowest

water level elevations, coupled with the wave allowance, are critical determinants.

Constraints imposed by the sounding tube also must be considered. Ideal top and

bottom elevations are calculated using these determinants, and then modified as

necessary by the physical constraints of the site. The NGWLMS Well/Sounding Tube

Worksheet, described in Chapter 6, is used to design and document the well/sounding

tube elevations. The following discussions will refer to it.
JANUARY 1991 10 NGWLMS ILSP

The top flange of the well shall be at least 1.5 m (5.0 ft) above the highest water

level (plus wave allowance) elevation to ensure that extreme high water levels are

measured. The acoustic sensor measures water level starting from a point near the

cal hole, which is about 1.0 m (3.5 ft) below the top flange. In addition, there is a 0.5

m (1.5 ft) "blanking zone" or blind area immediately below the cal hole, that the

acoustic sensor cannot measure water level in. This 1.5 m (5.0 ft) section is shown

as length A on the worksheet.

Length B on the worksheet is determined by the physical relationship of the pier

deck (or other structure) and the highest water level (plus wave allowance) elevation.

It may be that the top of the well has to be extended some additional length over the

1.5 m (5.0 ft) minimum elevation requirement in order to reach the pier deck. Length

B also acts as a safety factor as it essentially raises the highest possible water level

elevation. 

Ideally, the maximum top flange height above deck level should be about 1 m (3 ft)

to facilitate leveling and maintenance. However, the top flange can be higher if

necessary, and a downshot leveling fixture utilized. It may be that at some sites the

1.5 m (5.0 ft) requirement is not attainable. This can occur when the highest water

level (plus wave allowance) elevation is above the pier deck and the resulting top

flange elevation is either too high for practical reasons or physical constraints

prevent it. A shorter 0.5 m (1.6 ft) calibration tube has been developed that can help

in situations such as this, but it should only be considered a last resort as the shorter

calibration length means lessened accuracy.

Length C on the worksheet is the difference between the highest and lowest water

level (plus wave allowances) elevations. The highest and lowest water level

elevations are elevations that the water level is expected to either never, or rarely,

exceed. The highest and lowest water level elevations used will either be observed

or estimated values. Typically, observed values will be used at long term control

stations because they have been operating long enough to have experienced

infrequent extreme levels. Estimated values will be used at shorter term stations

because they have not been operating long enough to experience the extremes.

A wave allowance is added onto the water level extremes due to the fact that the

large diameter orifice used in the protective well does not totally filter out waves.

Therefore, even though an extreme water level may be within the

observed/estimated water level elevation limits, the crest or trough of a wave may

cause the water to momentarily exceed the limits. This can have several

undesirable results. The lower thermistor may get wet, thus biasing the air

temperature readings, or the water level may rise into the blanking zone and

therefore not be measured. At the bottom end of the well, water level falling below

the sounding tube will not be measured. The brass/cpvc tube connection is another

concern. It is preferred that this connection be kept below the lowest water level

(plus wave allowance) limit because of its potential to cause a false reflection, and

therefore bad data. Extreme water level elevations are critical for many applications

and must be measured.
JANUARY 1991 11 NGWLMS ILSP

The wave climate at each location is site specific, depending largely on local

topography, exposure to prevailing winds, and other variables. The wave allowance

for each site will be determined primarily by local knowledge as applied to average

wave height. Table 2 lists average wave heights for sites in the continental United

States. Other sources can be consulted for more localized wave data and for

stations outside the continental United States. Table 2 can be used to estimate

average wave heights for a station, which are then adjusted up or down by

knowledge of local conditions, particularly how exposed the well location is to wave

action. If the station is oriented so that it is exposed to prevailing winds crossing a

long stretch of water, heavy wave action is likely. The average wave height

determined for a location shall be used as the wave allowance at each end of the

well. In general, doubling the average wave height reduces the frequency of

occurrence from 50% to approximately 10% or less. The well orifice will further

reduce wave height in the well by about another 20%. This method of determining

the wave allowance value should provide adequate elevation in all but the worst

cases. If the wave allowance length can be increased at either end of the well

without compromising other requirements, it shall be done as a safety factor.

Lengths B and D essentially accomplish this. 

Length D on the worksheet represents a length added onto the lowest water level

elevation as a safety factor. Again, an improperly installed brass/cpvc junction may

give a erroneous reading if the water level should fall below it. Therefore, if there is

still ample water depth after calculating the lowest well elevation (including the orifice

assembly), an extra amount of well length might be added as a safety factor. Exact

guidelines cannot be given on how to determine how much extra, without detailed

current and wave information at a specific location, but in general the lower a well

orifice is, the less effect waves and currents will have. At sites located in, or near,

the surf zone, the orifice should be placed as deep as is practical.

There cannot be a standard minimum elevation off the harbor bottom specified for

the well orifice. Personal judgement, based upon experience and the local bottom

type, must be exercised. In general, however, for areas with hard, rocky bottoms

which will experience little change, a minimum 0.5 m (1.5 ft) clearance is desirable.

In areas where the bottom is sandy, or the beach profile is subject to substantial

seasonal change, the orifice should be kept much higher off the bottom. 

The brass antifouling tube section is typically 0.9 m (3.0 ft) in length but may be

shortened if the water depth is shallow. This is shown as length F on the worksheet.

There is also a requirement that the sounding tube be offset from the orifice by one

well diameter. Since the typical well has a 0.2 m (0.5 ft) diameter, and the orifice is

recessed down into the orifice assembly, a value of 0.1 m (0.3 ft) is used. This is

shown as length G on the worksheet. Therefore, the lower section of the well (below

the lowest water level plus wave allowance) will typically be at least 1.0 m (3.3 ft),

unless the brass antifouling tube must be shortened due to water depth limitations.

In some cases the lowest water level elevation (plus well allowance) will be too close

to the harbor bottom for the above requirements to be met. This will require that

Length D be minimal or eliminated. In such cases, the antifouling tube may be

shortened, or the brass/cpvc junction carefully tested and installed above the lowest

water level (plus wave allowance).
JANUARY 1991 12 NGWLMS ILSP

Mean Annual Mean Annual

Location Wave Height Location Wave

Height 

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

ATLANTIC COAST

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Maine New Jersey (cont)

 Moose Peak 0.5 m (1.5') Ludlam Island^ 0.6 m (1.9')

New Hampshire Maryland

Hampton Beach 0.4 m (1.4') Ocean City 0.6 m (1.8')

Massachucetts Virginia

Nauset 0.6 m (1.8') Assateague^ 0.8 m (2.6')

 Cape Cod^ 0.8 m (2.5') Virginia Beach* 0.6 m (1.8')

Rhode Island Virginia Beach 0.6 m (2.0')

 Point Judith 0.6 m (1.8') North Carolina 

 Misquamicut^ 0.4 m (1.4') Nags Head* 0.9 m (3.0')

New York Nags Head 1.2 m (3.9')

 Southampton^ 0.6 m (1.9') Wrightsville^ 0.7 m (2.3')

 Westhampton^ 0.8 m (2.6') Oak Island 0.4 m (1.2')

 Jones Beach^ 0.8 m (2.6') Holden Beach^ 0.5 m (1.7')

 Short Beach 0.5 m (1.7') Georgia

New Jersey St. Simon Is. 0.1 m (0.4')

 Monmouth 0.5 m (1.7') Florida

 Deal^ 0.7 m (2.3') Daytona Beach* 0.6 m (1.9')

 Toms River 0.6 m (2.0') Ponce deLeon 0.7 m (2.2')

 Brigatine^ 0.7 m (2.2') Lake Worth* 0.7 m (2.3')

 Atlantic City* 0.8 m (2.8') Palm Beach* 0.7 m (2.3')

 Atlantic City (BEP)0.4 m (1.3') Boca Raton^ 0.6 m (1.9')

 Atlantic City USCG0.6 m (1.9') Hillsboro 0.4 m (1.3')

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

GULF COAST

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Florida (cont)

 Naples* 0.3 m (1.0') Navarre Bch+ 0.7 m (2.3')

 Cape San Blas 0.2 m (0.7') Santa Rosa 0.4 m (1.4')

 Panama City+ 0.5 m (1.7') Louisiana

 Greyton Beach+ 0.5 m (1.7') Grand Island 0.4 m (1.4')

 Crystal Beach+ 0.5 m (1.7') Texas 

 Beasley Park+ 0.6 m (1.8') Galveston* 0.4 m (1.4')

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

PACIFIC COAST

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

California California (cont)

 Point Loma 0.6 m (2.1') Point Arguello 0.8 m (2.5')

 South Carlsbad+ 0.8 m (2.7') Natural Brdges+ 0.9 m (2.9')

 Carlsbad+ 0.9 m (2.9') Thornton+ 1.2 m (4.1')

 Huntington Beach* 0.5 m (1.7') Goat Rock+ 1.4 m (4.6')

 Huntington+ 0.8 m (2.6') Point Arena 0.8 m (2.6')

 Bolsa Chica+ 0.7 m (2.2') Prairie Creek+ 1.1 m (3.7')

 Leo Carrillo+ 0.7 m (2.3') Oregon

Pt Mugu (PEG)+ 0.9 m (3.0') Umpqua River 1.0 m (3.3')

 Pt Mugu* 0.8 m (2.7') Yaquina Bay 1.6 m (5.1')

 McGrath+ 1.1 m (3.5') Washington 

 Carpinteria+ 0.6 m (1.8') Willapa Bay 0.6 m (1.8')

 Point Conception 0.8 m (2.8') Cape Flattery 0.5 m (1.7')

 El Capitan+ 0.6 m (2.0')

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

^ CERC Beach Evaluation Program * CERC Wave Gage Records

+ CERC Littoral Environmental Observation Program

Table 2

Mean Wave Height at Coastal Localities

of the Conterminous United States
JANUARY 1991 13 NGWLMS ILSP

2.3.2-C Protective well thermistor elevations

The purpose of the two temperature sensors is to monitor any temperature

differentials in the protective well. It is desirable to have the lower temperature

sensor as low as possible in the well so as to obtain a representative measurement

for the entire length of the well. However, it is also important to minimize the

chances of the sensor from getting wet, as this will result in a false air temperature

value. Use the following procedure to compute an elevation that will result in the

lower temperature sensor getting wet only a small percentage of the time. Tidal

datums for the site are required. Compute this elevation as follows:

! Determine the Great Diurnal Range (Gt) for the site. Gt is equal to

MHHW - MLLW. 

! If the Gt is less than or equal to 0.3 m (1.0 ft), place the lower

temperature sensor above MHHW by 2 x Gt. The formula, therefore is;

2

t elevation = MHHW + (2 x Gt).

! If the Gt is greater than 0.3 m (1.0 ft), place the lower temperature

senso 2r above MHHW by 30% of the Gt. The formula, therefore is; t

elevation = MHHW + (0.3 x Gt).

! If the value turns out to be above the highest observed/estimated water

level, place the sensor at the highest observed/estimated water level.

2.3.3 BACKUP PRESSURE SENSOR ASSEMBLY

 

The backup sensor assembly consists of the 8200 data recorder, mounting board

assembly, pressure sensor, temperature sensor, junction box, and cables.

The pressure sensor shall be installed on a separate pile from the protective well

and at the same elevation, within +/- 0.2 m (0.5 ft), as the protective well orifice. The

temperature sensor shall be installed immediately adjacent to the pressure sensor

as its data is required to adjust the water level data.

There are two different configurations that may be employed when installing the

backup pressure sensor. Each one has different advantages and disadvantages.

Select the configuration most suitable for the site and available logistical support. 

2.3.3-A Direct (in water) measurement configuration

The first configuration is where the pressure and temperature sensors are installed

directly in the water. The first configuration is advantageous in that it does not

require the addition of the gas purged system. It also allows the temperature sensor

to double as a water temperature sensor. Disadvantages are that the exposed strain

gauge of the pressure sensor can be affected by marine fouling and that the sensor

is subject to galvanic corrosion (dis-similar metals). Unless the sensor can be

cleaned regularly in areas having marine growth, or protected in some other way, the

second configuration may be required. If deployed directly in the water, it may be

advantageous to use a mounting board assembly. The mounting board assembly

is designed to allow the sensor to be removed from the water, cleaned and/or

serviced, and replaced back to the same elevation without using divers.
JANUARY 1991 14 NGWLMS ILSP

2.3.3-B Indirect (out of water) measurement configuration

The second configuration is where the pressure sensor is teed into a gas purged

line, terminating in an underwater brass orifice, and monitors the pressure variations.

The pressure and temperature sensor are installed above water in the instrument

shelter. The main advantage to the second configuration is that the fouling and

corrosion are avoided. The brass orifice with nitrogen gas bubbling out of it is very

resistant to marine growth and does not corrode. The main disadvantage is that

another system (nitrogen gas tank, regulator, manifold, tubing, and orifice) is

introduced that requires maintenance and periodic nitrogen gas resupply. This

configuration also eliminates water temperature data as the temperature sensor

must be installed with the pressure sensor.

2.3.3-C Junction box

The 8200 data recorder junction box allows venting of the pressure sensor to

atmospheric pressure, merging of the pressure sensor and thermistor cables (alpha

cable), and facilitates maintenance by providing a break point for the cables between

the sensors and the 8200 data recorder. The junction box requires a protected, yet

reasonably accessible, location convenient to the servicing of the pressure sensor.

Typically this will be immediately above where the pressure sensor is installed. The

junction box's distance from the 8200 data recorder is limited by an alpha cable

length of 15 m (50 ft). 15 m (50 ft) of cable is also provided between the junction box

and the sensors, however, much of this must be used as a service coil.

2.3.4 ANTENNA ASSEMBLY

The antenna assembly consists of the antenna, cable, mounting bracket, and

antenna mast. The antenna shall be installed so that it is pointing in the specified

direction and angle with no obstructions to interfere with the transmission. The flat

plate antenna has a very wide (96 @ 3db) beam path so obstructions that are some O

distance from the antenna, and partially obstruct the line of sight path, should not

usually cause a problem. Use trigonometry to determine if a tall structure some

distance away may substantially block the signal path, since the structure height,

distance, and pointing angle are known. 

Precautions with regard to nearby objects must be observed to insure optimum

performance from the antenna. Objects in the near transmission field will distort the

antenna radiation pattern. Particular precaution should be exercised if the object is

another GOES antenna which may be operating on or near the same frequency as

the NGWLMS. In addition to keeping any objects out of the direct line of sight path

of the antenna, maintain at least a 1 m (3 ft) clearance on each side. This

represents approximately 1 wavelength for the frequency in use. If the object is

another antenna, a distance of more than 1 m (3 ft) is advised. A 0.6 m (2.0 ft)

minimum roof clearance is recommended. If the instrument shelter is a fiberglass

house, the antenna may be mounted inside, and will transmit through the wall/roof.

This may be advisable in areas of vandalism or heavy ice problems.
JANUARY 1991 15 NGWLMS ILSP

The standard antenna cable length is 10 m (30 ft). If this is not long enough, a

continuous length (no connectors) of low loss cable shall be used. It is important to

determine the length of antenna cable required during the reconnaissance as the low

loss cable length must be made specifically for each site. 

The antenna may require a support mast. The antenna has a mounting bracket that

attaches to a 5 cm (2 inch) diameter pipe. A short pipe mast may be attached to the

roof, or a longer mast may be attached to the pier deck, and extend up above the

roof. The antenna may be secured to a meteorological tower if one has been

installed to support ancillary sensors.

2.3.5 SOLAR PANELS

If AC power is not available at a site, a solar panel must be used for the 9000 RTU.

If AC power is available, the use of a solar panel is recommended, but not required,

for most NGWLMS installations. The ideal configuration is to have the 9000 RTU

connected to AC and also have a solar panel connected. The 9000 RTU can accept

a variety of power sources simultaneously and the solar panel provides insurance

against power failures. Long term power outages are not uncommon on some piers

and at remote locations. 

A separate solar panel is recommended for the 8200 data recorder. The 8200 data

recorder is supplied by the manufacturer with dry cell batteries with an estimated

operational life of one year. Replacing the dry cell batteries with a 12 volt gel cell

and solar panel is encouraged for remote sites where regular maintenance intervals

are a year or over.

The size of the solar panels required to keep the 9000 RTU and 8200 data recorder

batteries charged is determined by the average power consumption for each unit

and the site location. The average power consumption for a standard 9000 RTU

field unit is about 65 ma. This value can increase considerably, however, if ancillary

sensors, different types of board, or non-standard devices are connected to the 9000

RTU. Even different versions of software can change the power consumption if

sampling schemes for sensors are changed. The average power consumption for

a 8200 data recorder is 45 ma. The Sutron 9000 RTU Operations and Maintenance

Manual has procedures on how to compute the power consumption for various 9000

RTU configurations. The site location is important as it determines how much

sunlight the panel receives, and therefore how much power is available. The Sutron

manual also provides a simple procedure with graphs, figures, and an example on

how to compute the size of solar panel required. NOS typically uses a 30 watt panel

for the 9000 RTU and a 5 watt panel for the 8200 data recorder. 

The solar panel(s) may require a support mast. Solar panels are typically supplied

with a bracket capable of mounting to both 5 cm (2 inch) diameter pipes and flat

surfaces. The same mast installed for the GOES antenna may be used, or a

meteorological tower. 
JANUARY 1991 16 NGWLMS ILSP

RATING DEFINITION 

 

LIGHT: Clean or slight growth, components may be covered by

a light covering of slime type growth. Infrequent

cleaning required. 

MEDIUM: Components are partially to completely covered by light

plant and/or animal life with scattered small shellfish

(barnacles, limpets, mussels, oysters, etc.). Thickness

of growth is limited to about 3 cm (1 inch). Annual

cleaning is sufficient. 

 

HEAVY: Components are completely covered by heavy plant

and/or animal life. Large clusters of shellfish or

other large organisms. Thickness of growth may be

considerable. Frequent cleaning is required. 

Note if growth is constant or varies seasonally.

Table 3

Marine Fouling Scale

2.3.6 ANCILLARY SENSORS

Different types of ancillary sensors may be required at a site, depending upon

program requirements. Some of the ancillary sensors require much more site

preparation than others. In some cases, a tower may be erected to support

meteorological sensors that require minimum height elevations in order to collect

meaningful data. Ancillary sensor design and installation requirements are

discussed in detail in Chapter 5, as they are not considered part of a standard

NGWLMS station.

2.3.7 ENVIRONMENTAL PARAMETERS

 

Environmental conditions specific to the site can affect site preparation requirements

and should be taken into account. Some parameters which should always be

evaluated are marine fouling, waves, currents, and freezing/ice cover potential.

2.3.7-A Marine fouling

Marine fouling can significantly impair high quality data collection by clogging the

protective well and the pressure sensor. It is therefore important to assess

beforehand how severe marine fouling may be so that it can be considered in the

design and in preventive maintenance procedures. Marine fouling should be

evaluated against a standard scale. A general rating system is provided in Table 3.

Each station shall be rated as having a light, medium, or heavy fouling potential.

Document this on the NGWLMS Site Report (see Chapter 6).
JANUARY 1991 17 NGWLMS ILSP

2.3.7-B Currents and waves

Current and wave conditions can affect the site design. Current velocities greater

than 0.3 m/s (0.5 knot), and wave heights greater than 0.6 m (2.0 ft), can cause

significant draw down in the protective well and pressure sensor if not properly

guarded against with parallel plates. Parallel plates are required on all protective

well installations, where there is the possibility of current and wave conditions

nearing or exceeding the limits, except those where the shroud configuration must

be used. "Mini" parallel plates are required on all pressure sensors deployed

directly in the water. 

Current conditions can also affect the orientation of the protective well with respect

to the pile and current direction. In areas of strong currents, the preferred orientation

of the well is on the side of the pile relative to the flow, i.e., with the flow

perpendicular to the axis connecting the centers of the cylindrical piling and well (see

Water Level Measurement Errors Caused by Tide Gage Stilling Wells, Part III,

prepared by H. Shih, dated March 1, 1983).

2.3.7-C Other

 

Any other environmental conditions, such as seasonal ice formation, pollution, wind

direction and speed, that affects data collection should be noted and appropriate

provisions implemented.

2.4 DESIGN DATA DOCUMENTATION

 

Thorough documentation of the office information, reconnaissance findings, and

design is critical to an efficient installation. The NGWLMS Site Report, NGWLMS

Well/Sounding Tube Worksheet, site drawings, photographs, etc., ensure thorough

documentation. 

The following items shall have been documented during the design phase:

SITE

Owner (address & phone no.)

Contact (address & phone no.)

Permit/license 

Shipping address

Special Requirements

SUPPORT STRUCTURE

Type (pier, bulkhead, etc.)

Elevations and measurements

Water depth and bottom type

Access 

PROTECTIVE WELL

Well location

Well elevation and length

Cable lengths

Brackets

Potential temperature problems

ANTENNA

GOES azimuth and elevation

Antenna location

Mounting mast and bracket

Cable type and length
JANUARY 1991 18 NGWLMS ILSP

INSTRUMENT SHELTER

Existing vs. new

Utilities/Solar Panel

BACKUP SENSOR

Configuration 

Mounting board assembly length

Junction box location

Cable length

ANCILLARY SENSORS

Type

Location(s)

Cable length(s)

DIVING

Safety assessment

Physical constraints

Equipment availability

BENCH MARKS

Recovered marks

Additional marks

ENVIRONMENTAL DATA

Waves, wind & currents

Marine fouling

Lightning potential

Freezing 

TOWER

Type

Location

Anchor design

MISCELLANEOUS

Tool and equipment list

Preliminary design/drawings

Cost estimate and schedule

A complete list of components, hardware, tools, and any other gear required to

perform the installation should be compiled before mobilization. Appendix B lists

common tools and equipment used in NGWLMS installations and can be used as

a starting point.
JANUARY 1991 19 NGWLMS ILSP

3 SITE PREPARATION

 

Site preparation is the work that must be performed at the site to prepare the site for

a NGWLMS field unit installation. This chapter will cover all requirements up to

installing and initializing the field unit. Many site preparation requirements have

been discussed in the design chapter. These, and other requirements, will be

covered in more detail in this chapter.

Appendix A lists those items which will be delivered with each field unit and auxilary

components required for installations. The auxilary components do not include

special components dependent upon specific site requirements.

3.1 INSTRUMENT SHELTER

 

If a small room, or area, in an existing building is not available as an instrument

shelter, a wood frame, masonry, or fiberglass building specifically designed, built, or

purchased for the shelter is required. A 2x2 m (6x6 ft) prefabricated fiberglass

shelter is usually of sufficient size and the most cost effective. The shelter should

be secured to a suitable structure or foundation in accordance with accepted

engineering practices.

Utility connections are required where feasible. Arrange for hookup while on site if

this was not done previously. 110/120 volt, 50-60 HZ, AC power shall be provided

where cost effective or directed. Solar panels are alternate power sources.

A voice grade RJ-11S telephone jack switched telephone line connection shall be

provided where cost effective or directed. The 9000 RTU will be wired directly to the

telephone jack. No telephone line may necessitate periodic synchronization

(specifications are 6 months) of the GOES satellite transmission clock by an onsite

terminal. Also, any change in station parameters will have to be accomplished

onsite. 

Select where the 9000 RTU and 8200 data recorder are to be located in the shelter.

If hung on the wall, they should be fastened to support members, or to a backing

board to distribute their weight. Bolts are preferred over lags. There should be at

least 0.2 m (0.5 ft) of clearance between the cable entry side of the enclosures and

anything which may interfere with running the various cables into them. Sufficient

front and side clearance for opening the enclosure doors should also be available.

Grounding is required at all stations. Grounding shall be provided by a single point

AC ground. This is best accomplished by installing an electrode underwater and

running a copper wire (#8 or heavier) up into the shelter. The electrode shall be a

copper rod, minimum 1 cm (1/2 inch) diameter by 2.4 m (8.0 ft) long, or a copper

plate, minimum 0.2 m (2.0 ft ) of 20 gauge sheet. Acceptable alternatives are using 2 2

the ETG ground wire or the ground lug in the shelter's power box if it can be

determined that the power box ground is properly grounded. If the station is

considered to be at risk from a lightning strike, then a lightning protection system

shall be required. Appendix C provides guidelines on determining lightning risk and

protection system specifications.
JANUARY 1991 20 NGWLMS ILSP

3.2 PROTECTIVE WELL

 ASSEMBLY

The protective well shall be white, 15 cm (6

inch) diameter, schedule 80 PVC pipe.

Schedule 40 pipe may be used in sheltered

locations where damage by waves, debris,

or vessels is not a concern. Larger diameter

or different materials may be used if already

installed and conformance to other

requirements are met.

Schedule 80 slip flanges shall be cemented

on each end of the well. The top hat and

mounting plate assembly attach to the upper

flange and the orifice assembly attaches to

the lower flange. All top well flanges shall be

machined down to a smooth surface. It is

important that the upper flange have a

smooth, level surface, otherwise the

mounting plate assembly may not seat flush

on the flange. 

The well shall be ventilated by two sets of

four 4 cm (1.5 inch) diameter holes drilled at

90 degrees. The upper set shall be drilled

0.3 m (1.0 ft) above the upper thermistor,

typically 0.2 m (0.5 ft) below the top of the

upper flange. The lower set of venting holes

shall be located 0.3 m (1.0 ft) above the

lower thermistor. The vent hole elevations

may be adjusted up or down if they conflict

with bracketing locations. The vent holes shall be covered with modified stainless

steel screen mesh NO HUB "M" couplers to prevent debris and insects from entering

the well. It may be necessary at stations where thermal gradients are a problem, to

adjust the elevations of the vent holes to more suitable elevations, or to install extra

sets of vent holes. Be sure to document any nonstandard vent hole configurations.

The copper well insert is a 0.6 m (2.0 ft) long piece of copper sheet rolled into a

cylinder and joined with a pipe seam. The copper insert shall be placed inside the

well bottom so that the well bottom receives protection from marine fouling. 

Well location and elevation requirements are discussed in Section 2.3.2. Table 4

summarizes the requirements, but refer to the other sections for detailed

explanations. The NGWLMS Well/Sounding Tube Worksheet will provide guidance

and a format to document the installation.

Figure 3-1

Protective Well Configuration
JANUARY 1991 21 NGWLMS ILSP

Location Requirements:

! Within 15 m (45 ft) of the 9000 RTU, although up to 30 m (100 ft)

can be accomodated.

! Secure, accessible location.

! Proper thermal environment.

! Stable support structure.

! Vertical mounting, plumb within 1 cm/m (1/8 inch/ft).

Elevation Requirements:

! Top of well a minimum of 1.5 m (5.0 ft) above the highest water

level (plus wave allowance) elevation.

! Bottom of well a minimum of 1.0 m (3.3 ft) below the lowest water

level (plus wave allowance) elevation.

! Total length of well determined by summing the distance between

highest and lowest water level (plus wave allowance), plus top and

bottom well minimums, plus safety factor lengths, and adjusted for

physical constraints.

Table 4

Protective Well Requirements Summary

Figure 3-2

Top Hat Assembly

3.3 TOP HAT ASSEMBLY

The assembly consists of a schedule 80

slip flange, a short 0.3 m (1.0 ft) piece of

schedule 80 pipe, a vent hole screen, and

a slip cap, all 15 cm (6 inch) diameter. 

Drill four 4 cm (1.5 inch) diameter vent

holes 90 degrees apart around the

midpoint of the pipe. Protect the vent holes

with the same NO HUM "M" stainless steel

mesh screen used on the protective well. 

Use PVC primer and glue to cement the

cap and flange onto the pipe. The overall

length of the assembly is about 0.4 m (1.3

ft).

3.4 ACOUSTIC SENSOR MOUNTING PLATE ASSEMBLY

The acoustic sensor mounting plate assembly consists of a flat, split, aluminum plate

with bolt and vent holes, an aluminum tube stop clamp, and associated hardware.

The aluminum has an anodized protective coating. 
JANUARY 1991 22 NGWLMS ILSP

Figure 3-3

Orifice Assembly

3.5 ORIFICE ASSEMBLY

The orifice assembly consists of a schedule 80 threaded flange, a double cone

orifice, and parallel plates. The orifice diameter shall meet the requirement D/3,

where D is the well diameter. A schedule 80 slip-to-thread coupler, double cone

orifice, and shroud may be substituted at shallow sites, with currents less 0.3 m/s

(0.5 knot) and waves less than 0.6 m (2.0 ft), where bottom support for the well may

be required or parallel plates cannot be installed due to physical constraints. An

installation procedure for a standard orifice assembly is described as follows.

Orifice Assembly Installation Procedure

 

The following procedure facilitates the installation (or replacement) of a standard

orifice assembly at sites where it may be difficult for divers to maneuver the

assembly. It is assumed that the protective well with bottom flange is already in place.

1. Surface personnel lower the copper sheet insert to the divers, who then

install it.

2. Surface personnel lower a weighted rope down the well, approximately 3

m (10 ft) past the well bottom, and tie it off up top.

3. Surface personnel lower the parallel

plate on a second rope down next to the

well. If this is not feasible, the parallel

plate will have to be lowered over the

side of the pier, and transported

u n d e r n e a t h . L i ft b a g s a r e

recommended to accomplish this. 

4. Divers remove the weight from the first rope. Divers thread the rope down

through the orifice and tie it off on the parallel plate standoffs. The rope may also

be tied off to a short piece timber, pipe, or something similar, that is placed

lengthwise between the plates.

5. Divers disconnect the parallel plate from the second rope or lift bag, while

signaling surface personnel to pull up on the first rope. Divers guide the parallel

plate into place and secure with bolts. 

6. The first rope is then untied by divers and pulled back up the well by surface

personnel. 

3.6 BACKUP PRESSURE SENSOR ASSEMBLY

The backup pressure sensor consists of a Sutron 8200 data recorder, junction box,

pressure sensor (typically Druck® or IMO DeLaval®), and temperature sensor. A

mounting board assembly, or gas purged system, may also be involved depending

upon the configuration selected (see Section 2.3.3). 
JANUARY 1991 23 NGWLMS ILSP

Site preparation required for the backup pressure sensor assembly, other than

selecting the 8200 data recorder and junction box locations, is dependent upon the

configuration. Configuration one (direct measurement) may involve installing the

guide brackets for the mounting board. The length of the mounting board should

have been determined during the design phase. The guide brackets are short

lengths of stainless steel with the ends boxed in to "capture" the mounting board.

The top guide bracket is constructed differently so that it does not fully "capture" the

mounting board. This facilitates the configuration, where the top bracket is at pier

height, by allowing the mounting board to be lowered at an angle until the next lower

guide is encountered. A bolt on either side of the top guide is then tightened to

secure the mounting board. The guide brackets may be installed in many ways,

depending upon conditions. The guides may be attached to a backing board which

is then attached to a support structure. They may be fastened directly to a support

structure (typically a vertical bulkhead). They may be attached to slotted track bars

hung off of a standard belly band/threaded rod type installation. The mounting board

shall be installed as near to plumb, within 1 cm/m (1/8 inch/ft), as is possible. 

Configuration two (indirect measurement) involves the installation of a gas purged

system consisting of a nitrogen tank, regulator, pressure manifold, tubing, and brass

orifice. The gas purging system should be installed in accordance with the Users

Guide for the Gas-Purged Pressure Recording (Bubbler) Tide Gage, February 1977.

The sensor is teed to the undamped side of the pressure tubing.

3.7 ANTENNA

The antenna has a mounting bracket provided that clamps to the end of a 5 cm (2

inch) diameter galvanized steel pipe. The pipe may be as short as 0.6 m (2.0 ft) in

length or a maximum of 3.0 m (10.0 ft) if unsupported. Longer lengths require

support by guy wires or some other method. One end of the pipe shall be threaded

so that it can be screwed into a baseplate. The baseplate can be bolted either to the

instrument shelter roof or pier deck. Any openings cut or drilled into the roof should

be waterproofed with an appropriate sealant. If the roof cannot support the antenna,

the pipe may be bolted to the deck and run up alongside the shelter until it is at least

0.6 m (2.0 ft) above the roof. Stainless steel U-bolts shall be used to secure the pipe

to the shelter.

Mounting the antenna inside the instrument shelter is an option if it is a fiberglass

shelter. Bolting a 5 cm (2 inch) PVC flange to the wall and cementing in a 5 cm (2

inch) sweep elbow is the recommended mounting method. The antenna will transmit

through the fiberglass wall/roof. The interior power cable will not interfere with the

signal.

3.8 CONDUIT

All cables exterior to the shelter, with the exception of the antenna cable, shall be

protected by rigid conduit. All cables, which may be exposed to potential harm, shall

be protected by conduit, regardless of location. The conduit can be PVC, galvanized

steel pipe, or any other corrosion resistant material. Some locations may require

explosion proof conduit. Conduit to the protective well shall junction through a
JANUARY 1991 24 NGWLMS ILSP

service elbow located just below the flange and upper well vent cover. The service

elbow can be bolted, screwed, or glued to the well. Conduit diameter size is

dependent upon the number and type of cables to be run through it, but a minimum

diameter of 3 cm (1.25 inch) is recommended for the three sensor cables that will be

running between the well and the 9000 RTU.

Sweep type (large radius) bends shall be used where ever possible to facilitate

pulling cable through angles in the conduit. All PVC connections shall be primed

and joined with PVC cement. Junction boxes shall be used when the conduit run is

long and intricate. A pull through line shall always be left in the conduit to facilitate

the addition of future sensor cables. The conduit shall be securely fastened to the

support structure. Galvanized omega clamps are recommended for securing the

conduit to wood and concrete surfaces.

3.9 SENSOR REFERENCE MARK

The Sensor Reference Mark (SRM) is defined as a mark, established within one or

two leveling setups of the primary water level sensor, that meets the criteria listed

below. Its purpose is to facilitate leveling requirements associated with maintaining

the NGWLMS sensors, by providing a stable point from which to track NGWLMS

sensor elevations, through the establishment of a leveling history. The intent is that

the SRM will be used to determine differences in elevation resulting from

maintenance performed on the primary sensor, and from any destabilizing

movement occurring on the support structure itself.

3.9.1 PERMANENT SRM ESTABLISHMENT CRITERIA

The SRM may be one of two types. The first type shall be installed when the SRM

can be established in accordance with monumentation requirements specified in the

User's Guide for the Installation of Bench Marks and Leveling Requirements for

Water Level Stations (User's Guide). A pre-existing network bench mark is the first

choice for the SRM. A notation should be added to the bench marks description

recording its designation as SRM. If a new mark is set as a SRM, it shall be a NOS

bench mark disk stamped appropriately for the station and incorporated into the

station bench mark network. A mark set in a concrete pier is considered acceptable.

3.9.2 TEMPORARY SRM ESTABLISHMENT CRITERIA

The second type shall be installed when the SRM cannot be established in accordance

with the User's Guide, such as on a wooden pier. In this case a tide staff, ETG, or

temporary bench mark (TBM) can be used. The SRM TBM may be a disk or some

other type of fixed object (preferably more permanent than a nail or some other typical

"very temporary" TBMs) providing a recoverable high point. If a disk is installed, the

stamping shall be designated with TBM, the last four digits of the station number, a

number, and the present year. For example, the SRM at Fort Point, CA, would be

stamped TBM 4290 1 1991. If some other high point is used, it shall be painted or

distinctively marked some other way, and the designation shall follow the same format.

The TBM shall be fully described and illustrated on the bench mark sketch similar to a

network bench mark, however, it's elevation will not be published.
JANUARY 1991 25 NGWLMS ILSP

4 FIELD UNIT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION 

AND INITIALIZATION

This chapter addresses the installation and initialization of the NGWLMS field unit

assembly. It is assumed that all site preparations have been completed in

accordance with Chapter 3, including power and telephone (if feasible). Support

documentation (9000 RTU Operations And Maintenance Manual, NGWLMS User

And Operators Manual, Model 8200-0 Data Recorder Operations And Maintenance

Manual) should be consulted if more detail on system operation is desired.

4.1 FIELD UNIT ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

 

This section covers mounting and interconnecting the field unit assembly

components. The field unit assembly is defined as the following components:

! 9000 Remote Terminal Unit (RTU).

! Primary water level sensor (acoustic + 2 air temperature sensors).

! Aquatrak® (acoustic sensor) installation kit.

! 8200 Data Recorder. 

! Backup water level sensor (pressure + temperature sensors).

! Backup sensor mounting assembly.

! GOES antenna and optional solar panel(s).

! Associated cables, connecters, etc.

A field unit installation is comprised (but not necessarily in the order) of the following:

! Construction, testing, and installation of the primary water level sensor

sounding tube assembly.

! Construction, testing, and installation of the backup water level sensor

assembly.

! Leveling connection of acoustic sensor to bench mark network.

! Mounting and testing the GOES flat plate antenna.

! Mounting the solar panels (optional).

! Mounting the 8200 Data Recorder.

! Mounting the 9000 RTU.

! Documentation.

The following general procedures shall be observed in all cases:

All wire and resistor connections shall be double checked for correct placement and

tightness by a second person before the system is powered up. 

All cable ends, sensor openings, instrument panels, etc., shall be protected from the

elements (dirt, moisture, etc.) during the installation process. 
JANUARY 1991 26 NGWLMS ILSP

All parameters (time, date, coefficients, passwords, etc.) entered into the field unit,

via the laptop computer, shall be verified by a second person.

All documentation items, such as measurements, serial numbers, etc. shall be

verified by a second person.

Any non-standard components, configurations, or any other special circumstances,

shall be carefully documented. 

All excess cable shall be neatly coiled and hung in a service loop inside the

instrument shelter. This will facilitate repairs or replacement later on. Avoid coiling

the antenna cable too tightly as this may contribute to unacceptably high signal loss.

4.1.1 ACOUSTIC SENSOR SOUNDING TUBE ASSEMBLY

Construction and installation of the acoustic sensor sounding tube assembly

involves:

! Determining the sounding tube assembly length.

! Constructing the sounding tube assembly.

! Testing the acoustic sensor/sounding tube assembly.

! Testing the two temperature sensors.

! Attaching the two temperature sensors and bails.

! Mounting the assembly in the protective well.

! Running the sensor cables to the 9000 RTU.

! Documentation.

4.1.1-A Computing the sounding tube assembly length.

The sounding tube assembly is composed of three sections:

1. The calibration (cal) tube (known length).

2. The brass antifouling tube (known length).

3. The cpvc sounding tube (variable length).

The cal tube consists of a length of 1 cm (1/2 inch) diameter cpvc tube with the top

end outside diameter machined down to accommodate the acoustic sensor head,

a cpvc coupler (with inside ridge machined out to fit over the tube) glued near the top

end to provide a surface for the sensor head to abut, a small hole about 0.2 m (0.5

ft) from the tube bottom, a partially split cpvc coupler cemented onto the bottom, and

a stainless steel hose clamp used to attach the cal tube to the sounding tube. Each

cal tube is numbered and calibrated with an acoustic sensor head to create a

matched set. 

The cal tube total length is typically 1.3 m (4.4 ft) long [NOTE: Earlier versions of the

cal tube were 0.2 m (0.5 ft) shorter]. However, a length of 1.2 m (3.9 ft) is used in

the following computations as the remainder of cal tube extends above the top well

flange, and therefore is not used in computing the sounding tube length.
There is also a 0.5 m (1.6 it) cal tube that may be used where there are limitations

on the height of the protective well (see Section 2.3.2-8). If this is the case, use 0.6

m (1.9 it) instead of 1.2 m (3.9 it) in the computations below.

The brass antifouling tube is typically 0.9 m (3.0 ft) in length, but may be less in

those shallow depth cases where it must be shortened to keep the brass\cpvc junction

below lowest expected water level.

Therefore. only the cpvc sounding tube is usually a variable that must be computed.

However. the orifice offset is one other factor that must be taken into account. It is

a requirement that the sounding tube terminate 0.2 m (0.5 ft) above the orifice. Since

the orifice cone Is recessed down about 0.1 m (0.2 ft) into the flange. the offset ends

up 0.1 m (0.3 ft) above the well bottom. Therefore the total sounding tube assembly

length is 0.1 m (0.3 ft) shorter than the protective well length.

The protective well length is defined as the distance from the top surface of the top

well flange (not the top hat assembly flange) to the bottom surface of the bottom well

flange (not the orifice assembly flange). Confirm the protective well length onsite.

The cpvc sounding tube length is computed as follows;

As an example. assume a 6.1 m (20.0 it) protective well with a standard length

antifouling tube.

Therefore use two 1.5 m (5.0 ft) sections with couplers, and cut the one 1.5 m {5.0

ft) trim section (no coupler) to 0.9 m (2.8 ft), to provide the required 3.9 m (12.8 ft)

(see next section for description of sounding tube kit).

JANUARY 1991 27 NGWLMS ILSP
JANUARY 1991 28 NGWLMS ILSP

DESCRIPTION PART NO. QTY.

Sound Tube, cpvc, 1.5 m (5.0 ft) NPN 4

Sound Tube, Trim cpvc, 1.5 m (5.0 ft) NPN 1

Sound Tube, Red Brass, 0.9 m (3.0 ft) NPN 1

Center bail, S.S., 15 cm (6 inch) 6-18002-1 5

Tube cutting guide, Alum. B-18006-2 1

Sleeve Coupling, cpvc NPN 1

Cable Ties Panduit #PLT 1.51-M 12

Table 5

Aquatrak® Installation Kit Parts List

4.1.1-B Constructing the sounding tube assembly.

 

The Aquatrak® installation kit was specifically fabricated for use with the NOS

NGWLMS Aquatrak® sensor of the 3000 series labeled NOS-NG. The kit is used

to standardize installations. The kit contains enough cpvc tubing to construct a 9.7

m (31.9 ft) long sounding tube assembly. If a longer assembly is required, use

sounding tube sections from other kits. Table 5 lists the parts provided with the

Aquatrak® installation kit (BARTEX S/N S-3000-28).

In addition the following tools and materials will be needed:

 

A. cpvc primer (typically purple) and cement (typically orange)

B. hacksaw

C. trimming knife

Inspect the lower edge of the top coupler on the cal tube for a bead of cpvc cement.

Sand down any bead that is found. A bead will prevent the coupler from seating

flush on the acoustic sensor mounting plate. 

Construct the sounding tube assembly, using the Aquatrak® Installation Kit as follows:

! Cut the trim tube to the required length using the cutting guide.

Carefully deburr the inside and outside of the cut end. 

! Prime the uncut end of the trim tube and the coupler end of a 1.5 m (5.0

ft) length.

! Apply cement sparingly to the tube only in an even band approximately

1 cm (1/2 inch) from the primed end. Do not allow any cement to go

into the tube end.

! Immediately insert the tube end into the primed coupler with a twisting

motion until the tube bottoms out.

! Repeat the previous three steps to join the other end (cut end) of the

trim tube to the antifouling tube. Ensure that the hose clamp is tight

and is securely fastening the antifouling tube and coupler together.

! Repeat the cementing steps to join the remaining sounding tube

sections to the section just constructed.
JANUARY 1991 29 NGWLMS ILSP

! Connect the cal tube to the sounding tube using the stainless steel

hose clamp. Ensure that the sounding tube butts firmly against the

inside ridge of the cal tube coupler and that the hose clamp securely

fastens the two.

! Wait at least 30 minutes after the last joint is cemented before handling.

! Place a hand on either side of each joint and give a firm twist to test the

integrity of the connection before deployment.

4.1.1-C Testing the acoustic sensor/sounding tube assembly.

Test the acoustic sensor/sounding tube assembly as follows before proceeding further:

! Attach the acoustic sensor head to the sounding tube assembly. 

! Wire the cable into the 9000 RTU (see Figure 4-9 for wiring diagram).

! Power up the 9000 RTU (it does not have to be mounted). 

! Toggle the "READ AQT A" switch on the acoustic sensor module. 

Record the value displayed on the LED panel. Check that the displayed value is

equal, within +/- 0.1 m (0.2 ft), to the length of the sounding tube (from cal hole to

end). If the value is different, measure that value down from the cal hole and mark

where it falls. If it falls at a joint, the joint is probably bad. If it falls between joints,

then there may be something stuck to the inside of the tube that is sending back a

reflection. The tube may need to be flushed out or that section may need replacing.

If it appears that the acoustic sensor is bad, replace it or consult headquarters before

deploying. Record the test results on the Sensor Test Worksheet (see Chapter 6).

4.1.1-D Testing the two temperature sensors.

Test the two temperature sensors before attaching them to the sounding tube. It is

recommended that the backup water level assembly temperature sensor be tested

in conjunction with the two air temperature sensors. The backup temperature sensor

can be tested by either; hooking it up to the 8200 data recorder and letting the 9000

RTU log the readings, or by connecting the backup temperature sensor as an

ancillary sensor and enabling it as a GROUP 1 sensor (see Section 5.3). Readings

in degrees C are only available from the 9000 RTU, as the 8200 data recorder

displays the voltage reading. 

! Des 1 2 ignate one sensor as the upper (t ) and the other as the lower (t ).

Ma 1rk the upper (t ) sensor and mating cable plugs with tape or some

other 2 method to differentiate it from the lower (t ). The backup water

b

level assembly temperature sensor shall be designated t .

! Connect the two air temperature sensor cables to the mating cables

and wire into the 9000 RTU (see Figure 4-9 for wiring diagram). Power

up the 9000 RTU and log into the program using a laptop computer.

Follow instructions specified in Section 4.2.2 to log temperature data.

! View the logged data and complete the Sensor Test Worksheet. The

sensors may not track each other exactly as the thickness of the rubber

coating may vary. They should eventually acclimate, however, and the

difference between the two should be within +/- 0.3 C. If the O

differential exceeds +/- 1.0 C, replace or consult with headquarters O

before deploying. 
JANUARY 1991 30 NGWLMS ILSP

4.1.1-E Attaching the two temperature sensors and bails.

Mount the temperature sensors and bails as follows:

! Measure and mark on the sounding tube the appropriate spots for the

temperature sensors: 0.6 m (2.0 ft) above the cal hole for the upper

sensor and as determined in Section 2.3.2-C for the lower sensor.

! Attach the lower temperature sensor to the marked spot and use tie

wraps to secure the cable up along the sounding tube to where the

upper sensor is to be attached. 

! Attach the upper sensor and use tie wraps to secure both cables the

rest of the way up to the elbow junction box level.

! Secure the excess cable length by either running it up and down the

sounding tube between sensors, or by attaching it as a coiled loop. 

! Ensure that the cable is not covering the cal hole. 

! Attach a center bail so that it straddles each cpvc coupler, with each one

oriented at 90 degrees from the previous bail. Place the lowest bail just

above the brass tube joint. Do not place the last bail on the brass tube.

! Take measurements for documentation, particularly the elevation of the

lower temperature sensor (see Chapter 6). 

4.1.1-F Mounting the assembly in the protective well. 

The assembly shall be mounted in the well as follows:

! Attach the stationary section of the mounting plate assembly to the top

well flange using two 1 cm (1/2 inch) bolts. Hand tighten only.

! Insert the sounding tube assembly into the protective well so that the

bottom edge of the top collar of the cal tube ends up flush with the top

of the mounting plate clamp. Secure the clamp around the tube.

! Pull the temperature sensor plugs out through the junction box, or up

through the plate, depending on the well configuration. Feed the

acoustic sensor mating cable in through the junction box and up through

the plate.

! Attach the removable section of the acoustic sensor mounting plate

assembly using two 1 cm (1/2 inch) bolts and hand tighten. 

! Set the top hat on the mounting plate and adjust the positioning so that

all four 1 cm (1/2 inch) bolt heads fit flush into the top hat's flange holes.

Secure the top hat in position using four 2 cm (3/4 inch) bolts and then

tighten the mounting plate 1 cm (1/2 inch) bolts by using a flathead

screwdriver and a wrench. Wedge the screwdriver head in between the

1 cm (1/2 inch) bolt heads and the flange hole sides to hold the bolt and

use the wrench to tighten. Note: Do not fully tighten down top hat until

the field unit installation has been completed and levels run.

NOTE: Stainless steel hardware used with the acoustic mounting plate must use

nylon washers and have a heat shrink material applied to that part of the shaft that

will be in contact with the plate. This is to prevent galvanic corrosion between

dissimilar metals.
JANUARY 1991 31 NGWLMS ILSP

4.1.1-G Running the sensor cables to the 9000 RTU.

 

The cables must be protected by conduit when exterior to the shelter. It is typically

easiest to feed the cables through the conduit starting at the well end since this

avoids having to feed through the plugs. A pull through line should have been left

through the conduit when it was installed.

Run the cables inside the shelter along the wall to the 9000 RTU mounting area.

Bundle and tie wrap the wires together whenever they are exposed. Secure them

to the wall as appropriate. Leave any excess for each cable neatly coiled and hung.

Instructions for connecting the cables to the 9000 RTU are in Section 4.1.7.

4.1.1-H Documentation.

Construction and installation of the primary water level sensor assembly is to be

documented using the NGWLMS Site Report and the NGWLMS Well/Sounding

Tube Worksheet. Sensor test results should be reported on the Sensor Test

Worksheet.

4.1.2 BACKUP WATER LEVEL SENSOR ASSEMBLY 

Installing the backup water level sensor assembly involves:

! Testing the backup water level pressure and temperature sensors.

! Installing the sensors (direct or indirect configuration).

! Installing the junction box.

! Running and connecting the alpha (combined water level pressure and

temperature sensor) cable to the 8200 data recorder.

Two different manufacturer's pressure sensors are being used as backup sensors,

the Druck® and the IMO®. The sensors are similar in physical appearance and

operation. Installation differences consist of a minor wiring change, a different slope

value in the 8200 data recorder setup, and different mounting components.

4.1.2-A Testing the backup pressure and temperature sensors.

 

The sensors shall be tested before installation. This requires that the 8200 data

recorder be temporarily connected and initialized (see section 4.2.1).

! Connect the sensors to the 8200 data recorder.

! Lay the backup sensor on the pier deck and record at least an hour's worth of

values. The recorded values should approximate zero. 

! The temperature sensor should be tested in conjunction with the primary sensor

air temperature sensors for comparative purposes (Section 4.1.1-D).

! Record the test data on the Sensor Test Sheet.
JANUARY 1991 32 NGWLMS ILSP

Figure 4-1

Backup Sensor

Mounting Board

4.1.2-B Direct (in water) installation.

Installation of the sensors is dependent upon the

configuration selected. If the sensors are to be installed

directly in the water, it may be desirable to utilize the

mounting board assembly (Figure 4-1). If so, use the

following procedure to assemble the mounting board and

deploy the sensors.

! Drill the cable slot and holes for the mounting block.

Fasten the mounting block, lifting eye, and conduit

connector to the mounting board.

! Remove the back cableway panel and feed the

backup and temperature sensor cables up through

the cable slot, up the cableway, and out through the

conduit connector.

! Place the sensors in the mounting block and tighten

the screws.

! Install the backup sensor parallel plate being careful

not to cross thread the nylon insert.

! Replace the back cableway panel and secure using

small stainless steel sheet metal screws.

! Secure line to lifting eye.

! Insert the mounting board assembly into the guide

brackets installed during site preparation and

ensure that it is fully seated. Tighten the bolts on

the top bracket to lock the mounting board into

place.

4.1.2-C Indirect (out of water) installation.

If the sensors are to be installed out of the water, tee the

pressure sensor off of a convenient section of gas tubing

on the undampened side of the bubbler manifold. Tie

wrap the temperature sensor to the pressure sensor. 

4.1.2-D Junction box installation.

Location of the junction box is dependent upon the type

of configuration selected for the site.

! If the sensors are installed directly, mount the

junction box plug side down in a spot that is

sheltered from the elements and the public.

Mount the junction box so that the two sensor

cables form a sufficiently long service loop to

allow removal of the mounting board.

! If the sensors are installed indirectly, mount

the junction box in a convenient, protected,

location inside the shelter.
JANUARY 1991 33 NGWLMS ILSP

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9

JUNCTION BOX TERMINAL BLOCK

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9

JUNCTION BOX TERMINAL BLOCK

DRUCK® SENSOR CABLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR CABLE

R W YBO B S S W B

E H E L R L H H H L

D I L U A A I I I A

T L E N C E E T C

E O G K L LE K

W E D D

*

||| ||| |||

||| ||| |||

||| ||| |||

||| ||| |||

R W YBO BSG B

E H E L R L HRR

D I L U AAI E O

T L E N C EEW

E O G K L N N

W E D

*

 * The shields from both the Druck® and the temperature sensor cable should be connected to A7.

 The shields may be covered by colored plastic. They will be thicker than other wires.

ALPHA CABLE

IMO® SENSOR CABLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR CABLE

R W Y B G S S W B

E H E L R H H H L

D I L U E I I I A

T L E E E E T C

E O N L L E K

W * D D

||| ||| |||

||| ||| |||

||| ||| |||

||| ||| |||

 R O W Y B BSG B

 E R H E L L HRR

 D A I L U A I E O

 N T L E C EEW

 & G E O K L N N

 E W D

*

 * The green wire from the IMO® and the shields from the IMO® and temperature cable should be

 connected to A7. The shield may be covered by colored plastic. It will be thicker than other wires.

ALPHA CABLE

Figures 4-2 and 4-3

Junction Box Terminal Block Connections for Druck® and IMO® Sensors
JANUARY 1991 34 NGWLMS ILSP

! Ensure that the small junction box vent hole (in the back) is not blocked.

! Remove the junction box face and feed the backup and water temperature

sensor cables into the junction box through two of the strain relief plugs. Use

the wiring diagrams in Figures 4-2 and 4-3 to connect the cables to the

terminal strip. Feed the alpha cable (combined backup/water temperature

cable) through the remaining strain relief plug. Connect the wire leads to the

terminal block as shown in Figures 4-2 and 4-3. 

! Insert a small bag of desiccant before sealing the junction box. 

4.1.2-E Running the alpha cable to the 8200 data recorder.

Run the alpha cable through conduit and/or along the inside shelter wall to the 8200

data recorder. Refer to Section 4.1.4 on how to connect the cable to the 8200 data

recorder terminal block. Have the connection verified. 

4.1.3 LEVELING TO THE SENSORS

The primary sensor must be connected to the bench mark network in order to

reference the data to the bench marks (particularly the SRM) and monitor the

stability of the sensors and support structure. This section describes the special

fixtures and procedures used to accomplish this.

Connect the acoustic sensor leveling point to the bench mark net, SRM, and staff (if

existent) in accordance with the User's Guide for the Installation of Bench Marks and

Leveling Requirements for Water Level Stations (October 1987) and the following

procedures.

4.1.3-A Leveling to the acoustic sensor

The leveling point for the acoustic sensor is defined as the top shoulder of the upper

coupler on the cal tube. It is exposed by loosening the lower one or two Allen screws

of the metal coupler on the acoustic sensor transducer head. The upper Allen screw

on the coupler is not to be disturbed. The upper screw head has been coated with

paint, and covered with shrink wrap, to detect any disturbance. Any time the upper

Allen screw is accidentally loosened, or found loose, the head shall be replaced and

the disturbance documented.

Two leveling fixtures have been fabricated to facilitate leveling to the acoustic sensor

leveling point. The first fixture is made to slip snugly onto the short section of cpvc

tube extending above the leveling point coupling. The fixture has a rounded high

point on which to hold the rod and has the fixture length, measured in both metric

and english units to the thousandth place, engraved on its side. Figures 4-4 and 4-5

illustrate the use of the leveling fixture. The length of the leveling fixture shall be

compensated for in the leveling record (NOAA Form 75-29). Figure 4-6A is a

sample level sheet with the leveling fixture corrected for by subtracting the length of

the fixture from the backsight. The abstract (NOAA Form 76-183) shall show the

elevation of the leveling point only as shown in Figure 4-6C.
JANUARY 1991 35 NGWLMS ILSP

Figure 4-3

Leveling Fixture In Use Figure 4-4

Leveling Fixture Close Up

The second fixture is called a downshot fixture because it is used in cases where the

leveling point is too high for a rod shot. The downshot fixture is comprised of a

square aluminum tube, circular level bubble, adjustable legs, and a precise steel

tape (metric/english units in hundredths). The level is placed so that a hole in the

square tube is fit snugly onto the short cpvc tube section, the steel tape is hanging

vertically down the side of the well, and the legs adjusted so that the level bubble

indicates level. It may help to place the leveling fixture on top of the tube to prevent

the downshot fixture from lifting up. The zero end of the tape is then aligned with the

leveling point and a shot to the tape can be made. Figure 4-6B is an sample level

record sheet showing the use of the downshot fixture. 

Other fixtures or techniques shall be preapproved by N/OMA12.

4.1.3-B Leveling procedures

Levels to the primary sensor shall be spur runs, either from the tide staff rod stop or

the ETG reading mark, or from the SRM. The spur line requirement is dropped

when the tide staff and ETG are no longer used for daily observations (after the ADR

versus NGWLMS comparisons are completed and the ADR is removed). Frequency

of levels is in accordance with the Users Guide and Project Instructions. Removal

and installation levels are required any time the acoustic sensor/cal tube pair or the

stationary half of the mounting plate are to be disturbed or replaced.

After the levels have been abstracted and double checked, compute the difference

in elevation between the acoustic sensor leveling point and the primary bench mark.

This will be needed, along with the elevation of the PBM above the site datum, for

one of the primary water level sensor coefficients used to initialize the 9000 RTU

(see section 4.2.2). 
JANUARY 1991 36 NGWLMS ILSP

Leveling procedures for the SRM are as follows;

! The SRM shall be connected every time levels are run to the sensor.

! In cases where several sets of levels may be required during sensor

maintenance, (i.e., the removal and reinstallation of a sounding tube,

acoustic sensor mounting plate [stationary half]), the first set of levels

will connect to a minimum of three bench marks, including the PBM and

SRM. The second set of levels may connect the sensor to the SRM

only.

! Removal levels must be checked against SRM level history before any

sensor assembly may be physically removed. If a difference exceeding

0.006 m (0.020 ft) between successive runs is found, the removal levels

shall be rerun again, this time including additional marks, to verify the

movement. 

! If the historical difference between the SRM and sensor(s) does not

exceed 0.006 m (0.020 ft), while the historical difference between the

PBM and sensor(s) does exceed 0.006 m (0.020 ft), verification levels

for the PBM/sensor difference are still required. The support structure

and sensor(s) may be moving at the same rate.

! If annual inspection levels have been, or will be, run within +/- two

weeks of the maintenance action, levels to the SRM (or PBM if no

SRM) only are acceptable, if the SRM has a demonstrated history of

stability.
C\I

m

~ ~

.5: ~

0 s..

Q. CO

g>w .-

~ -

0 -9!

0 ~ e

0 ~ ca

9 ~ &()

~ as ~

C\I :3 '.

,... 0- 0)

'CC c

a: .

w ~

m .

~ m Z

~ 0 ... ~

~ ~ ~

~O) m

::) '@) ~

, b

~ Q. c:

Q) .9 ca

~ CI) >..

~ ~ e

c: oS :3

~ <I) <I)

z

Q .

'""'< 2 

~w

... ~

(I) ...

W 0

Q ~;

t- LI..

~~

",0-

~!

~;

o~

o-c

~~

~'" 1ft ~l '8'

~B Z

o~ -

u!c ...

::>~ ww c >~

Q wi

§ "'w

-' ww cz C/) ~

E ~(Jw~

D.

f~Q

z

::>~0~~~

f2

~:0

U) ~mi~ri: wQ~0~~:~

u; w~0

...

~i

~~...~ ~

i:~

-J

ii

XII-~

o~

~-

~~

~~

~~a:w

:1:1-

I-~

(/)

~~

~w

~I-Zz~~~5

(/) ~~w~

-

COO)~CO&n

~O)~O)~ (")~(")~C\I~ ~I ~ I ~ I ~

O~<O1l)

?-OOC\l ~~

0)~t

1~

1010

--~~0~l

't>~

(')o l ~

C\i-

~~

~t 

0) ~

~--0

IIE

CO(:>-

II

~~

c:i

><

~-~

II

~

r2

~...~~ ~8~ "- "-

~

~~~-.-

0:

.S-~~5-

.c:

0: ~~~~~1

~~~-.-5~

"8

"-~E

It) -

co

<:> 0

t

E§

C'!

.,... +Z

=>

a: 0~!

e e

(\I"" 00

res

~c:)

I I

: :

z: !

~ J

c 0

i Z

~ I -

;;::

'E

-.:: §

'"d)

C/)

Q)

c:

.£E

<:>

,... 8

ciW

-I~~

~:

..w

(.) z«

Icn5
w~!iF'

~~

8~

1"- ~

!g~

Z

iW !~~

'4W

!~~

,a. 0

1~2

.;~

I;) c

i i~Is zQ~<

,~

I(/)

I~f

l;:-

e.

~::>

~.. OJ 1~~

~z~

Ww

>~

WJ:

:Ju:,

ww

~

0:

-~

(.JW~" Ii §m ::"" ~

c "0 lO t::

I Ct3

e. ~

~ §

Lu C/)

. a:

~ w

1m :I:

I~ I- 0 ~

I~

z

=' =C

a:~

a: 0

I,i"

1cn~u

Ii' wc~0~

C/)

I-:~

U) w~

.9i

51cnc ~~

cO

~~

~~1--

~~

a:w

:1:1- I-~

cn

'5~

~a:

:JW

cn~

~i

~~ ~

~~

~I

i;-

~~

~~

(/)

'a~

~ffi ::)...

(/)2;~~

CI) ~~~~

~I '8

1~ I ~

""-""-O~

~~C"')C"')

'-

~

C\lCOO~Il)~

't-.0>~~-0

C\I_?ooIl)(")O>

000000

~I~ c~1"- C

LOILO '-_. ~0) "'""

('"'I

~0

1 C\J:

~~

~~CJ)Q --nn-

.c: ~~

()

co

.Q

.9

.J:l.

Q)

"-Bi

~

-

.(:,

o. "-

CI)

Q) ~0

-.-

-0~~~0c~1"- 00

IIE0~

II ~~~0

)(

1"- ~

-JI- ~~

.."..,., ~

01

"""I Q

CO) 0~

'0""- 8It)

0,

It)!

"tO!

I() C

In"

-a.c:

CI) ~

.g~a-

.c:

0; "-

CI) ~~~0

"<'.

e

;:J ~

o.

t:

'-

~

..9>

E

:g

I.()

'"'- C+

z:

::>

a: c~0

u.

E E

co~

cc

LC)C

~c

CC

I +

z: ~ :) :

a: :

W

C ()

a: z

~ ffi () u..

-< ~

m c

.

wuz~

U) B

W

-I

CD<~

:::! <

JANUARY 1991 40 NGWLMS ILSP

8200 TERMINAL BLOCK

4.1.4 8200 DATA RECORDER

Installing the 8200 data recorder involves:

! Mounting the 8200 data recorder.

! Connecting the 8200 cables (Alpha and Communication).

! Installing the batteries.

! Documentation.

4.1.4-A Mounting the 8200 data recorder.

Mount the 8200 data recorder at the spot selected during the site reconnaissance.

Double check the 8200 data recorder location to ensure the following:

! Within 3 m (10 ft) of the 9000 RTU. 

! Comfortable access to the compartment. 

! Situated to facilitate cable run from sensors and to the 9000 RTU.

! Sufficient right side clearance for cable entries. 

! Sufficient front clearance for opening compartment door. 

4.1.4-B Connecting the 8200 cables (Alpha and Communication).

! Run the alpha cable in through one of the two side portholes (size PG9)

with strain relief plugs. Connect the alpha cable to the 8200 data

recorder terminal block as shown in Figure 4-7.

! Add a jumper (small length of ground wire) between the shield ground

and the 8200 chassis lug located in the lower left corner of the front

panel. Use a nut and washer to secure the wire.

|

|

|

|

|

|

|

| |

| || |||||| XXXXXXXXXXX

*

B G B S WB Y R O

RRL HHL EER

OEA I I UL DA

WE C E T E L N

NNK L E O G

D WE

 - Denotes 29.4 K resistor (supplied with alpha cable) connection * Not Connected XXXXXXXXXXX

ALPHA CABLE

Figure 4-7

Alpha Cable To 8200 Data Recorder Terminal Block
JANUARY 1991 41 NGWLMS ILSP

! Do not ground or otherwise connect the 8200 Data Recorder enclosure

to the 9000 RTU enclosure (other than communications cable). The

two systems should be electrically isolated from each other.

! Plug the connector end of the communications cable into the jack

labeled "RS-232" on the front panel of the 8200 data recorder. Secure

the connector with the two screws. The other end of the cable is then

fed out through the remaining porthole strain relief plug and over to the

9000 RTU for connection. Tighten both strain relief plugs.

! Have the alpha cable connection verified for location and tightness. 

4.1.4-C Installing the batteries.

 

The battery cable connector plugs into a connector on the back side of the 8200 data

recorder front panel. This must be done by feel so prior practice is advised. The

plug has two round holes and a tab. The holes are aligned vertically and the tab is

oriented to the right side (porthole side) of the enclosure. Using one hand, hold the

plug and feel for the two "holes" on the back of the panel. Push the plug in until a

solid connection is felt. The tab must be pressed in to remove the plug.

! Place the batteries (four six-volt or a 12 volt rechargeable) in a harness

with cable in the compartment below the front panel. Plug it in.

! Once the battery pack is connected, the 8200 data recorder

automatically begins operation. Several status messages will flash

across the LED panel and it will then go dark. The ON/OFF "button" on

the front panel just turns the LED display panel on and off, not the data

recorder. See Section 4.2.2 for instructions on interacting with the 8200

data recorder.

4.1.4-D Documentation.

! Complete documentation as detailed in Chapter 6, particularly serial

numbers or other information from inside the enclosure. 

4.1.5 GOES FLAT PLATE ANTENNA

Installing the GOES flat plate antenna involves:

! Mounting the antenna.

! Running the cable to the 9000 RTU.

! Testing the antenna cable.

! Documentation.

4.1.5-A Mounting the antenna.

 

Verify that the nuts on the back of the flat plate antenna are secure. Place the

antenna mounting bracket on the antenna mast. Orient the antenna so that the

arrow (UP ^) on the back is pointing up. Adjust the antenna to the specified azimuth

(provided in degrees true) by pointing to a known landmark, or by using a compass.

If a compass is used, correct the specified azimuth to degrees magnetic with the

local deviation. Tilt the antenna to the specified elevation using an inclinometer.
JANUARY 1991 42 NGWLMS ILSP

Have the angle and elevation verified. Use "Never Seize" or equal on the two allen

screws used to tighten down the mounting bracket.

4.1.5-B Running the cable to the 9000 RTU.

! If the antenna is further from the 9000 RTU than the standard length of

10 m (30 ft), low loss cable (hard line coaxial cable) shall be used to

minimize line loss. This should have been determined during the design

phase and a low loss cable custom made for the site. The cable should

be one continuous length without any connectors. Connectors will cause

additional line loss.

! Attach one end of the cable to the jack on the antenna. Be especially

careful not to cross thread the connectors when attaching. Waterproof

the connection using coaxial cable putty or vulcanized rubber tape

layered over by electrical tape (see next Section 4.1.5-C before doing this).

! Run the cable back to the 9000 RTU being careful to avoid sharp bends.

The maximum bend radius for the standard cable is 3 cm (1 inch). 

! Conduit is not required unless the antenna cable is exposed to possible

physical harm from the public. Use fasteners at least every two feet to

secure the cable. Attach the other end of the cable to the jack on the

9000 RTU. Black tie wraps are recommended over white ones as they

are less likely to become degraded by ultraviolet rays.

4.1.5-C Testing the antenna cable.

The antenna cable shall be tested for excessive line loss. Test procedures are

detailed in Section 4.2.2 as the 9000 RTU must be initialized to test the antenna. An

antenna cable that is coiled too tightly may contribute to excessive line loss.

4.1.5-D Documentation

 

! Document the antenna s/n, cable type (standard or low loss),

non-standard cable lengths, azimuth and elevation angles, etc..

4.1.6 SOLAR PANELS (OPTIONAL)

A solar panel may be used in lieu of, or in addition to, AC power at appropriate

locations to recharge the 9000 RTU battery. If a solar panel is used in addition to

AC, a decision must be made whether or not to leave the AC cable plugged in. In

general, it is preferred to have the AC power connected as the constant charge is

better for the battery than the cyclical "exercising" from the solar panel. It may not

be desirable to have the AC power connected in areas of high lightning risk as power

surges from nearby lightning hits can enter the 9000 RTU through the AC line and

cause extensive damage. 

A solar panel may be used to recharge the 8200 data recorder if the NEMA

enclosure is modified (has a third port added) and the factory issued dry cell

batteries are replaced with gel cell rechargeable batteries. A separate solar panel

(not the 9000 RTU panel) shall be used for the unit. 
JANUARY 1991 43 NGWLMS ILSP

LATITUDE (Degrees) TILT ANGLE (Degrees)

 0 to 15 15 0 0 0

15 to 25 Latitude 0 0

25 to 30 Latitude + 5

0 0 0

30 to 35 Latitude + 10 0 0 0

35 to 40 Latitude + 15 0 0 0

 > 40 Latitude + 20 0 0

Table 6

Solar Panel Tilt Angles

4.1.6-A Assembling the panel(s).

Some assembly or prewiring may be necessary. Refer to the manufacturer's

instruction sheet enclosed with the panel(s). Some manufacturer's panels have an

opening which allows the installation of a strain relief plug. A spare 9000 RTU plug

may be used for this purpose. The wiring box and connections on the panel shall

be adequately protected against the environment.

4.1.6-B Mounting the panels(s).

 

The panel(s) may be mounted on the same mast as the GOES flat plate antenna,

if there is sufficient room, or to a separate mast. The panel may be mounted flat on

the roof if vandalism is a problem, but the panel will be less efficient this way. Also,

if the solar panel is some distance from the instrument, there may be a substantial

voltage drop. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for specifics on mounting

brackets and hardware included with the solar panel(s). Panel orientation should be

towards the equator with the back edge tilted up from the horizon as specified in

Table 6.

Figure 4-8

Solar Panel Cable To

8200 Data Recordsr
JANUARY 1991 44 NGWLMS ILSP

Check the solar panel with a voltmeter to confirm the proper polarity and voltage output.

The 8200 data recorder internally regulates the solar panel so no external regulator is

required. If a solar panel is to be used to charge the 9000 RTU battery, connect the cable

as detailed in Section 4.1.7(D).

4.1.7 9000 RTU

 

Installing the 9000 RTU involves the following:

! Mounting the 9000 RTU.

! Connecting sensor cables.

! Connecting communication cables.

! Connecting optional solar panel cable.

! Connecting the ground.

! Installing the battery.

! Documentation.

The following guidelines will apply to all 9000 RTU wiring connections:

! Snap the gray plastic panels off the cableways in between the strips of the

termination board in the lower compartment.

! Run all cables inside the cableways and out through the slots to the

appropriate connectors. 

! Loosen the designated terminal block screw.

! Strip the wire end about 3 mm (1/8 inch) and insert into the small rectangular

opening immediately beneath the screw. Retighten the screw.

! Lightly tug the wire to test for proper seating. Be sure to snap cableway panels

back on. 

The situation may occasionally be encountered where tightening the screw down does not

secure the wire. A possibility is that the wire has been placed behind the metal clamping

plate and should be pulled out and reinserted. If this does not work, what may have

happened is that the small metal plate attached to the backside of the terminal strip has

not been broken loose from the conformal coating. The plate can be broken loose by

applying more torque to the screwdriver until the plate snaps loose and tightens down on

the wire.

4.1.7-A Mounting the 9000 RTU.

 

Mount the 9000 RTU at the spot selected during the site reconnaissance. Double check

the 9000 RTU location to ensure the following:

! Comfortable access to both compartments. 

! Situated to facilitate cable runs from sensors, antenna, 8200 data recorder,

power supply, and telephone. 

! Sufficient right side clearance for cable entries. 

! Sufficient front clearance for opening compartment doors. 
JANUARY 1991 45 NGWLMS ILSP

4.1.7-B Connecting sensor cables.

 

Connect the acoustic/air temperature sensor cables to the 9000 RTU termination board in

the lower compartment. 

! Feed the two air temperature sensor mating cables through a porthole and

connect the wire leads to the top termination board (TB1) strip as per the

wiring diagram in Figure 4-9. The acoustic sensor mating cable shall be fed

in through a PG9 porthole. 

! Connect the wire leads to the middle termination board (TB2) strip as per

Figure 4-9. 

! Tighten the porthole strain relief plugs.

 

Figure 4-9

Aquatrak®/Air Temperature Sensor Cables To 9000 Termination Board

9000 TERMINATION BOARD 1

I..::-~ ::-:: ' '-_.~-'

I 8H

R I

0 E

W L

N D

I J,

B S

R H

0 I

W E

N L

D

I

I

.

L

A

C

K

I

B

L

A

C

K

~:---"~~';;'-'-':~-:" Denotes 29.4 k resistor (supplied wilt temperatwe sensors) conrlec-.

UPPER AIR TEMPERATURE LOWER AIR TEMPERATURE

SENSOR CABLE SENSOR CABLE

0000 TERMINATION BOA~ 2

I

I

B

L

A

C

K

R W G

E H R

DIE

T E

E N

AQUA TRAK CABLE

B

L

U

E
JANUARY 1991 46 NGWLMS ILSP

4.1.7-C Connecting communication cables.

Two types of communications cables are connected to the 9000 RTU. The 8200 data

recorder communications cable is a fiber optic cable that allows the 8200 data recorder and

9000 RTU to communicate with each other, but keeps them electrically isolated from each

other. This is to prevent a power surge that damages the 9000 RTU from also damaging

the 8200 data recorder and causing a data break at the site.

! Run the 8200 data recorder communications cable to the bottom termination

board (TB3) strip through a PG9 porthole.

! Run the cable through the cableway and connect the wire leads as per the

wiring diagram in Figure 4-10.

! Run the telephone wire (if available) in through a PG9 porthole plug and

connect to the top termination board (TB1) strip as per Figure 4-11. It may be

necessary to wrap the telephone wire with tape where it enters the plug to

ensure a good seal.

! Tighten the strain relief plugs.

* N/C - Not Connected

8200 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE

Figure 4-10

8200 Data Recorder Communications Cable To 9000 Termination Board

4.1.7-D Connecting optional solar panel cable.

 

If a solar panel is to be used, mount the solar panel and run the cable into the 9000 RTU

through one of the PG11 portholes with strain relief plug. The 9000 RTU internally

regulates the solar panel so no external regulator is required. Check the solar panel output

with a voltmeter to verify polarity and voltage. If panel output is low check the panel wiring.

Factory units have occasionally been found miswired. Connect the wires to the small

terminal block on the power step down board in the lower compartment as per the wiring

diagram in Figure 4-12. Wire colors may vary depending upon the cable type used. Be sure

to snap cableway panels back on.
JANUARY 1991 47 NGWLMS ILSP

Figure 4-11

Telephone Cable To 

9000 Termination Board

Figure 4-12

Solar Panel Cable

To 9000 RTU

Step Down Board

4.1.7-E Connecting the ground.

All stations are to be grounded, however, the extent to which grounding is required is

dependent upon the station's location. At stations where the probability of a lightning strike

(direct or nearby) is low or none, the 9000 RTU can be connected to an existing ground,

such as the ground provided in the station's AC power supply. Where the probability is

higher, a separate grounding system shall have been installed as part of the site

preparation, and the 9000 RTU shall be connected to that. Heavy copper wire (#8 or

greater) shall be used in either case. Connect the 9000 RTU to the appropriate ground

using the lug provided in the lower back right hand corner. Note: Do not ground the 8200

data recorder.

4.1.7-F Installing the battery.

 

Mark the installation date on the battery. Clip the battery leads in the bottom compartment

onto the appropriate tabs (red = +, black = -) on the 12 volt battery and position the battery

so it is clear of all wires and other components. Check to be sure the leads fit snugly on

the battery tabs. If they are loose, insert a long nose pliers into the end of the leads and

crimp slightly to provide more tension when connected to the tabs. DO NOT turn the 9000

RTU on until you have read Section 4.2.2. 

4.1.7-G Documentation.

See Chapter 6 for complete documentation requirements, however, each 9000 RTU has

a spiral notepad in a plastic bag in the lower compartment that provides an onsite unit

maintenance log. Update the notepad to include the site, date, personnel, installation

information, coefficients, ancillary sensors, etc. and other pertinent information.

9000 TERMINATION BOARD 1 eooo STEP DOWN ~ a

.

8

L

A

C

K

.

y

E

L

L

0

W

I

I

R

E

n

G

R

E

E

N

I

8

H

I

E

L

D

I

I

8

L

A

C

K

. Not COM~

TELEPHONE CABLE SOLAR PANEL CABlE
JANUARY 1991 48 NGWLMS ILSP

4.2 SYSTEM INITIALIZATION

This section provides instructions on initializing the 8200 data recorder and 9000

RTU. Initialization is the process of:

! Powering up the units.

! Entering/verifying system configuration. 

! Testing sensor/component operation. 

! Enter/verify associated sensor coefficients. 

! Sealing systems with desiccant. 

The Sutron NGWLMS User And Operators Manual and Model 8200-0 Data

Recorder Operations And Maintenance Manual should be consulted on guidance for

more extensive use of the software.

4.2.1 8200 DATA RECORDER INITIALIZATION

 

The 8200 data recorder should have been fully preprogrammed before being issued.

It automatically powers on when the batteries are connected. The time and date will

be set automatically by the 9000 RTU one half hour after the 9000 RTU is initialized.

No further interaction with the 8200 data recorder would be required if the installer

could be certain that the 8200 data recorder was properly configured before issue,

that the backup sensors were operating correctly, and that the 9000 RTU was

communicating with the 8200 data recorder. Therefore, it shall be standard practice

to set the time and date, verify the system configuration, and confirm proper sensor

operation before sealing the 8200 data recorder.

The 8200 data recorder has an internal software program which performs status

checks, sets time/date, enables sensors, sets parameters, views data, downloads

data, and many other functions. The instructions below address only those portions

of the program associated with initializing the 8200 data recorder. The program can

be accessed through one of two ways. One way is to use a PC with the TS8200

program. This will allow interaction on a menu driven basis. This is accomplished

by plugging the personal computer into the RS232 jack on the front panel of the

8200 data recorder and executing the TS8200 program. A menu will appear. 

The second way of accessing the internal software program is through the keypad on

the front panel of the 8200 data recorder. Interfacing with the program through the

keypad is not as user friendly, however, as through a personal computer with TS8200

due to the limitations of the small LED display. Therefore, the following instructions

are provided as if interaction is occurring through the keypad/LED display. The

keypad instructions can be easily followed if the TS8200 menu is being used instead.

4.2.1-A Setting time and date.

 

There is a six button keypad on the 8200 data recorder front panel. The [ON/OFF]

button toggles the display on and off. The four arrow [up, down, left, right] buttons

are used to move through different levels and options of the program. The [SET]

button is used to change settings. 
JANUARY 1991 49 NGWLMS ILSP

There is one main (primary) menu and five sub-menus (secondary) in the program.

There are nine main menu options, five of which are entry points into the sub-menus.

Some of the sub-menus have additional sub-menus (tertiary) and data item selections.

The up and down arrow buttons are used to move up and down through the menu.

The right arrow button is used to select options within a menu level. The left arrow

quickly exits a sub-menu by going up one menu level each time it is pressed.

To interact with the software program:

Press the [ON/OFF] button to display:

[ SUTRON 8200 VX.X ] ( VX.X is the ROM version installed)

This is a primary menu level. Press the down arrow button. This will step you down

through the menu to the next primary level to display:

[ UNITID: XXXXX ]

Confirm that the 8200 data recorder serial number on the enclosure matches the

UNITID. If it does not, change it by first pressing the [SET] button. This will start the

first digit blinking. Now press either the up arrow or down arrow button to increase

or decrease the number. Then go to the next digit by pressing the right arrow button

and correct it. Continue this process until the entire number is correct and then

press [SET] again. This will complete the process and allow you to continue. Press

the down arrow button to display:

 

[ DATE: 01/01/2000 ]

Set the date to the present GMT date by following the same process described for

UNITID. The one difference is that the [SET] button must be pushed to "jump"

across the slash (/) between month/day/year. Press the down arrow button when

done to dispaly: 

[ TIME: XX:XX:XX ] 

The time starts off at midnight (00:00:00) and automatically starts incrementing.

Using military time, set the time to GMT through the same process (pressing [SET]

to jump the colons between hour:minute:second). Your watch should be

synchronized with WWV (call 303-499-7111 or 202-653-1800). Press the down

arrow button when done.

4.2.1-B Verifying system configuration.

 

The screen should now display:

[ RECORDING ON ]

This level will be returned to; but, first hit the down arrow 5 more times to reach the

INSPECT SYSTEM primary level. Hit the down arrow three times until CLEAR

STATUS is reached. Hit the [SET] button. This will clear out any error messages
JANUARY 1991 50 NGWLMS ILSP

which may be generated from powering up the system. Hit the left arrow button until

INSPECT SYSTEM appears and then the up arrow button until the RECORDING

level is reached. 

This primary level turns the recording function on or off. It should read ON. If it

reads OFF, toggle it to ON by pressing the [SET] button, and be sure to use the

SAVE SETUP command later on. The next primary level is:

[ VIEW DATA ]

This primary level is an entry point into a secondary sub-menu level that allows you

to view data that is being collected. Press the right arrow button twice. 

 

[ LIVE READINGS ]

[ ANALOGX +X.XX ]

 

LIVE READINGS is a secondary sub-menu level of VIEW DATA. If you had

pressed the down arrow button the second time, instead of the right arrow button,

another secondary level called NEWEST READINGS would have appeared.

ANALOGX is a tertiary sub-menu level under LIVE READINGS. It displays the

voltage being measured from the backup sensor. Up to three ANALOGX (where X

= 1,2, or 3) channels can be viewed by continuing to press the right button.

However, only those sensors that have been enabled (turned on) under a later

secondary level will appear on this tertiary level. If no sensors have been enabled,

then nothing will appear past LIVE READINGS. If the down arrow button is pressed

while ANALOGX is being displayed, several other tertiary levels appear. They are:

[ WATERLEVEL +XX.XX ]

[ OUTLIERS + XXX ]

[ DEVIATION +XX.XX ]

[ BATTERY +XX.XX ]

 

Check these values for validity. To exit the tertiary level, press the left arrow button

twice. Pressing the left arrow button takes you back up a level. You will see; 

 

[ LIVE READINGS ]

[ VIEW DATA ]

 

If you pressed the left arrow button one more time you would go back to the top of

the menu (SUTRON 8200 VX.X). With VIEW DATA showing, press the down arrow

button to display:

 

[ SYSTEM SETUP ]

 

This primary level has several secondary, tertiary, and lower levels that allow you to

configure measurement parameters and enable sensors. Press the right arrow

button once to display: 

[ MEASMNT SCHEDULE ]
JANUARY 1991 51 NGWLMS ILSP

MEASMNT SCHEDULE is a secondary level of SYSTEM SETUP. Under it is a

tertiary level with several options to configure sampling times and intervals. These

are accessed by pressing the right arrow button once to display:

[ MEASINT 00:06:00 ]

Scroll through the others by pressing the down arrow button and verify the following

settings:

[ SAMPINT 00:00:01 ]

[ MEASTIME 00:07:40 ]

[ SAMPTIME 00:04:30 ]

[ PWRTIME 00:04:30 ]

[ #SAMPLES/SET 181 ]

[ #MEASMNT/LOG 001 ]

[ PWRMODE OFF ]

Then press the left arrow button to go back to MEASMNT SCHEDULE. If the down

arrow button is pressed while MEASMNT SCHEDULE is displayed, the next

secondary level is displayed as follows: 

 

[ ENABLE SENSORS ] 

ENABLE SENSORS is a secondary level of SYSTEM SETUP. Under it is a tertiary

level with about 75 channels that can be turned on or off. Scroll through the options

by pressing the down arrow button and verify, that for a standard NGWLMS

installation, the following options are on:

 

[ ANALOG3 ON ]

[ WATERLEVEL ON ]

[ OUTLIERS ON ]

[ DEVIATION ON ]

[ BATTERY ON ]

The display should indicate the following:

ANALAOG3 Me Lg __

WATERLEVEL _ Lg Av

OUTLIERS __ Lg __

DEVIATION __ Lg __

BATTERY Me Lg __

 

Use the left arrow button to go back to ENABLE SENSORS and hit the down arrow

to display the secondary level CONFIG SENSORS. Hit the right arrow to access the

enabled sensors and check that they are configured as follows. Note that there is

a difference in the WATERLEVEL SLOPE value between the Druck® and IMO®

sensors. Values for English units are enclosed in parantheses. 
JANUARY 1991 52 NGWLMS ILSP

ANALOG3

MEASURE ON

LOG ON

AVERAGE OFF

VALUE current value

SLOPE +0001.000

OFFSET +0000.000

RIGHT DIGITS 3

OUTLIERS

MEASURE OFF

LOG ON

AVERAGE OFF

VALUE current value

SLOPE +0001.000

OFFSET +0000.000

RIGHT DIGITS 0

 

BATTERY

MEASURE ON

LOG ON

AVERAGE OFF

VALUE current value

SLOPE +0001.000

OFFSET +0000.000

RIGHT DIGITS 2

WATERLEVEL (DRUCK®)

MEASURE OFF

LOG ON

AVERAGE ON

VALUE current value

SLOPE +0152.0 (+0500.0)

OFFSET +0000.000

RIGHT DIGITS 3 (2)

WATERLEVEL (IMO®)

MEASURE OFF

LOG ON

AVERAGE ON

VALUE current value

SLOPE +0347.5 (+1140.0)

OFFSET +0000.000

RIGHT DIGITS 3 (2)

DEVIATION

MEASURE OFF

LOG ON

AVERAGE OFF

VALUE current value

SLOPE +0001.000

OFFSET +0000.000

RIGHT DIGITS 3 (2)

You must save any changes made to the CONFIG SENSORS. If the primary level,

RECORDING, showed ON when the system was powered up, and you have not

made any changes under the primary level SYSTEM SETUP, you can leave the

SYSTEM SETUP level by hitting the left arrow button several times. If the

RECORDING level was toggled OFF, or you made changes, hit the right arrow

button until the secondary level SETUP appears. Hit the down arrow twice until

SAVE SETUP appears, and hit the [SET] button. This will save the changes.

Hit the left arrow until the primary level is reached. Hit the down arrow until the

primary level EEROM SETUP is displayed. Hit the right arrow button to enter the

level. The display will show:

[ SERIAL XXXXXXXX ]

 
JANUARY 1991 53 NGWLMS ILSP

Hit the down arrow button to scroll through the EEROM SETUP and verify the

following configuration:

 

[ SERIAL PROTOCOL ]

[ USER RATE 2400 ]

[ DUMP RATE 9600 ]* * dump and log rate can be set 

[ LOG RATE 9600 ]* at any of the options

[ TIME LIMIT 60 ]

[ POWER DELAY 1 ]

[ PRESS DELAY 5 ]

[ ANALG DELAY 5 ]

[ AMPGAIN xxx.xxx ]

The AMPGAIN is a number unique to each unit and should be on a sticker inside the

enclosure door. Enter the AMPGAIN if it is not already in the 8200 data recorder.

Any changes made while in the EEROM SETUP level will automatically be saved.

 

Return to the RECORDING primary level and verify that it is ON. Push the OFF

button to turn off the display.

4.2.1-C Verifying sensors operation.

Compare the real time backup pressure sensor water level reading to the primary

water level reading. The displayed data is actually a voltage which must be

converted to meters or feet. The voltage can be converted to meters by multiplying

by 0.29 (0.96 for feet). The temperature data displayed by the 8200 data recorder

is a voltage. Stored data from both sensors can be viewed using the program steps

described in Section 4.2.1-B. Either or both data sets can be used to verify proper

sensor operation or to help identify specific problems. The data should be compared

against any known existing reference points, such as an ADR or bubbler gauges, if

any. 

4.2.1-D Sealing the unit.

The final step is to open the sealed plastic package provided with the unit and place

the three bags of desiccant into the enclosure. However, do not perform this step

until the whole system has been checked out and will not be opened again before

departure. Place the bags so as not to press against any important connections.

Close the enclosure door and seal it tightly. 

4.2.2 9000 RTU INITIALIZATION

 

The 9000 RTU has a more sophisticated internal software program than the 8200

data recorder. Again, interaction with the 9000 RTU will be limited to only those

functions involved with initialization. If the 9000 RTU has a telephone line

connection, much of the interaction can be accomplished from the Field Operations

Groups or Headquarters. The basic tasks which must be accomplished to initialize

the 9000 RTU are:
JANUARY 1991 54 NGWLMS ILSP

! Power up the unit.

! Interrogate the 9000 RTU with a laptop PC.

! Set time and date.

! Enter/verify system configuration.

! Enable appropriate sensors.

! Enter/verify associated sensor coefficients.

! Test sensor operation.

! Test transmission power.

! Enable GOES transmission.

! Final check/logout.

! Documentation.

! Seal unit with desiccant enclosed.

4.2.2-A Power up the unit.

 

When all field unit cables are connected (sensors, antenna, 8200 Data Recorder,

telephone, solar panel) plug the power cord onto an AC socket. 

 

DO NOT turn the power switch on if the laptop PC is hooked up to the 9000 RTU.

This will stop the program from running. If this happens, turn the 9000 RTU off,

disconnect the laptop PC, and start over. If some checks had been performed

previously, reperform them, as some parameters may have gone to default values.

Turn the power switch on the power supply module to ON and observe the LED

status light (shaped like a figure 8) panel on the central processor module. The light

will flash through several patterns as the system initializes and goes through some

self tests. It will eventually stabilize (about 30 seconds) so that a horizontal bar will

stay lit in the center and a dot will flash in the upper left hand corner of the light

panel. A laptop PC can now be connected to the 9000 RTU. 

4.2.2-B Interrogate the 9000 RTU with a laptop PC.

 

Connect a laptop PC to the 9000 RTU using the terminal cable provided with the

field unit. The plug end of the cable connects to the jack on the same side of the

9000 RTU enclosure where the cables enter. Turn the laptop on and run TS9000.

When the MAIN MENU appears select option C-CONNECT TO RTU to

communicate with the 9000 RTU. Hit the carriage return until the following prompt

appears:

[ Login User: ]

Enter the user name and hit return. Entry into the program must be made at the

operator or manager level in order to modify any parameters.

[ Password: ]

Enter the password and hit return. 

[ Account Number: ]

Enter the account number (if any) and hit return. 
JANUARY 1991 55 NGWLMS ILSP

A performance test will then be executed by the program and the results displayed

with a disclaimer. An ERROR message will be displayed instead of an OK if any

errors are detected. Hit any key and the NGWLMS OPERATORS MENU will

display. 

4.2.2-C Set time and date.

Select the [T - System Time] option. Be sure that your watch has been

synchronized to WWV (303-499-7111 or 202-653-1800) before attempting this step.

Follow the instructions to set the time and date in GMT. Note that when setting the

time, the time does not actually start incrementing until you enter Y to a prompt that

asks you to confirm that what you entered is correct. Therefore, it is helpful to enter

a time setting about 30 seconds in advance, so that you will be able to start the clock

exactly when real time reaches the entered time. Whenever the time and date is

reset in the 9000 RTU it automatically resets the time and date in the 8200 data

recorder.

4.2.2-D Enter/verify system configuration.

Return to the OPERATORS MENU and select the [ S- System Parameter Setup]

option. A listing, partially shown below, will provide system configuration

parameters. Verify that the following parameters have been configured correctly:

[ Transmission ID XXXXXXXX ]

[ Transmission Time XX:XX:XX ]

[ Transmission Interval 03 hours ]

[ Transmission Channel XXX ]

[ Station Number XXXXXXXX ]

[ Station Name XXXXXXXX ]

Options 5 through 9 can be used to correct these, if necessary. With the exception

of the Transmission Interval (always 3 hours), all the parameters are site specific.

Both transmission time and interval are accessed under option 6. Although

transmission time is only provided in an hour and minute format, it should be set to

start five seconds past the minute given. This is to provide a small buffer between

the start of the site's transmission and the receipt of another site's transmission at

NESDIS, in case the operators watch is off a few seconds, or the unit's clock drifts.

For example, if the transmission time provided is 0134, the screen should show;

[ Transmission Time 01:34:05 ]

4.2.2-E Enable appropriate sensors.

 

Using the [Enable Anc. Sensor] option (1) of the SYSTEM PARAMETER SETUP

menu, check to see that the proper sensors are enabled. Standard installations will

use only the primary and backup water level sensors functions. Simply select the

sensor number and the program will ask if it is to be enabled. Respond [Y] or [N]

as may apply. The acoustic sensor is sensor 01 and the backup is sensor 02. The

temperature sensors associated with the water level sensors are automatically

enabled as part of those sensors. 
JANUARY 1991 56 NGWLMS ILSP

 3.755 m (12.32 ft) 3.755 m (12.32 ft)

+ (5.2615 - 4.1810 m) (17.262 - 13.717 ft) OR + 1.0805 m ( 3.545 ft)

= 4.8355 m (15.865 ft)

Round 4.8355 m (15.865 ft) to 4.836 m (15.86 ft) and enter as Coefficient 2.

4.2.2-F Enter/verify associated sensor coefficients. 

Use the [Sensor Variables] option (2) to check the coefficients for the enabled

sensors. Coefficient 1 for the primary water level sensor is the sensor offset noted

on the acoustic sensor head and represents the distance from the leveling point on

the sounding tube to the calibration reference point. Enter Coefficient 1 to the

thousandth place for metric field units and to the hundreth place for English field units.

Coefficient 2 for the primary water level sensor is the site datum offset and

references the primary water level data to the site datum of tabulation. The site

datum offset is determined from two sources. The first source is the primary bench

mark (PBM) elevation above site datum list which is provided in Appendix D. This

is the elevation of the PBM relative to the original staff zero of the site, not the

present staff zero (unless it is the original staff). The second source is the elevation

of the acoustic sensor leveling point relative to the PBM, determined by running

differential levels. Combine the two numbers as follows to determine the site datum

offset. Perform rounding after the two numbers have been added together.

PBM elevation above site datum 

 + (Leveling point elevation - PBM elevation) 

 = Leveling point elevation above site datum = Coefficient 2

Example: A NGWLMS has been installed at a site and levels have been run,

abstracted, and double checked. It is known from Appendix D that the elevation of

the PBM above site datum is 3.755 m (12.32 ft). From the levels, the elevation of

the acoustic sensor leveling point above staff zero is 5.2615 m (17.262 ft) and the

PBM elevation above staff zero is 4.1810 m (13.717 ft). Compute Coefficient 2 as

follows:

 

Note that if the acoustic sensor leveling point had been lower than the PBM, the

value in the parentheses would be negative and that the value is, in effect,

subtracted from the PBM above site datum value. Also note that in the metric case,

if the 1.0805 m was rounded to 1.080 m before adding it to the 3.755 m, Coefficient

2 would end up being 4.835 m, which is 1 mm off from the correct value of 4.836 m.

The procedure is to round after all mathematical functions have been performed (in

this case the addition of the two values).

The two coefficients are applied to the raw water level measured by the acoustic

sensor to reference it to the site datum. The raw water level is the distance

measured from the calibration reference point (located just below the calibration

hole) to the waters surface. For more information on calibrating the acoustic sensor,

consult NGWLMS Field Unit Acoustic Water Level Sensor Calibration Procedure.
JANUARY 1991 57 NGWLMS ILSP

Figure 4-13

Conceptual Relationship of

Acoustic Sensor Water Level Measurement,

Coefficients, and Site Datum

The two coefficients are used (Figure 4-13) to reference the raw water level data to

the site datum (labeled as water level data in the log), as follows:

Coefficient 2 - (Raw water level + Coefficient 1) = Water level above site datum.

Coefficients 3 and 4 of the primary

water level sensor are for the upper

and lower temperature sensors. The

value entered for each coefficient

should be 29400. The program will

display the coefficient in scientific

notation [2.940000+04]. 

 

Coefficient 5 designates which type

of cal tube is installed at the site.

Enter a 4 for a standard cal tube, or

a 2, if the 0.5 m (1.6 ft) cal tube is

being used. 

There are three coefficients

displayed for the backup water level

sensor but only coefficient 1 is used.

Coefficient 1 is for the backup

temperature sensor and is 29400.

Coefficients 2 and 3 are not used

and should be zero.

4.2.2-G Test sensor operation.

 

There are a number of methods for

checking the primary water level

sensors operation. The data being

collected can be viewed in real time,

using the acoustic sensor module

LED display or laptop computer, and

the stored values in the log can be

viewed via the laptop. The data can

be used to verify proper sensor operation or to help identify specific problems. The

data should be compared against any known existing reference points, such as the

ADR gauge, bubbler gage, staff readings, etc.. Raw water level data can also be

checked against actual onsite measurements. 

The backup water level sensors should have been checked using the 8200 data

recorder program, however, also look at the data using the 9000 RTU to ensure that

the two units are communicating properly. 

Return to the OPERATORS MENU and hit Esc. Then select the [R - Real Time

Sensor Display] option. Use the sub-menu to view the data coming from all the

sensors. Return to the operators menu and select the [L - View Log] option. Select
JANUARY 1991 58 NGWLMS ILSP

the appropriate sensor and specify the time period desired. Remember that the data

displayed in the log are averaged values while real time data are individual samples.

4.2.2-H Test transmission power.

 

Transmission power should be tested to ensure that it is set properly and that

sufficient power is making it through the cable to the antenna. The standard setting

is 9 - 10 watts at the 9000 RTU. The [ T - Transmit Test Format ] option under the

GOES SETUP MENU is used to send a transmission. The screen will display the

forward power and other related measurements after the transmission has been

completed. 

DO NOT transmit unless the antenna has been disconnected and a dummy load is

hooked up. Transmitting a test message may cause the loss of some other

organization's GOES data by transmitting simultaneously with it. Transmitting with

no antenna or no dummy load will harm the unit. 

Test the transmission power two ways and record the results on the Sensor Test

Worksheet. First; 

! Disconnect the antenna cable from the 9000 RTU. 

! Connect a wattmeter to the 9000 RTU using a short length of cable. 

! Connect a dummy load to the wattmeter. 

! Initiate a test transmission. 

! Record the maximum wattmeter reading during transmission.

! Record the results displayed on the screen. 

! Reconnect the antenna cable to the 9000 RTU.

! Disconnect the antenna cable from the antenna.

! Connect the wattmeter to the end of the antenna cable.

! Connect the dummy load to the wattmeter.

! Initiate a test transmission.

! Record the maximum wattmeter reading during transmission.

! Record the results displayed on the screen.

If the power being transmitted from the 9000 RTU is lower than 7 watts at the

antenna end of the cable, or if substantial line loss is detected, contact headquarters

for direction. Substantial line loss is defined as being greater than 3 watts loss per

7 watts of power/per 10 m (30 ft) of cable. Dependent upon the signal strength being

received at NESDIS corrective action may or may not be required. 

4.2.2-I Enable GOES transmission.

Return to the operators menu and select the [G - GOES Transmission Options]

option. Then select the [E - Enable or Disable Transmitter] option to turn the

transmitter on. Use the [F - View or Reset Software Fail Safe] option to check that

the software failsafe is ok. Use the [ V - Verify ] option to check all the parameters.
JANUARY 1991 59 NGWLMS ILSP

4.2.2-J Final check/logout.

 

Two final steps should be done before logging out. Go to the OPERATORS MENU

and select [ P - PERFORMANCE CHECK ]. This option will initiate a system

performance monitoring sequence and reports on the status of each. No status lines

should read ERROR, unless the GOES transmitter is intentionally disabled. Next,

use the [ I - SYSTEM INFORMATION ] option on the operators menu. This option

displays a summary of the system setup parameters, including GOES transmission

information, and enabled sensors with coefficients. 

To log out, go to the OPERATORS MENU, and hit the F1 function key. This will

display the MAIN MENU. Enter [ X - EXIT ] to logout. 

4.2.2-K Documentation.

 

See Chapter 6 for complete documentation requirements, however, items of special

note from this section are the system parameters, coefficients, sensor test results,

and transmission test results. 

4.2.2-L Seal unit with desiccant enclosed.

 

When the system has checked out, and confirmation has been received from

headquarters, place the bags of desiccant into the upper 9000 RTU compartment.

Then seal both compartments. This step should be delayed until just prior to the

field personnels departure to avoid exposing the desiccant to multiple openings of

the enclosure. 
JANUARY 1991 60 NGWLMS ILSP

DIAL NESDIS FROM FIELD PROGRAM ####################################

 # C O N F I G U R A T I O N #

 # #

 D. Dial NESDIS # Telephone No: XXXXXXXXXXXXX #

 C. Change Configuration # User ID: NOSXXX #

 Q. Quit # Com Port: X #

 # Platform ID: XXXXXXXX #

 # File Messages: YES #

 # Baud Rate: XXXX #

Enter Selection (DCQ) ####################################

Figure 4-14

NESDIS Data Retrieval Program Menu

4.2.3 FIELD UNIT OPERATIONAL CHECK

Proper operation of the field unit satellite communications shall be verified by field

personnel before leaving the area. This can be accomplished by contacting

headquarters personnel, who will check to see if transmissions are being received

and are acceptable, or by calling NESDIS directly and accessing up to the last 72

hours of transmissions. Contacting headquarters is preferred, however, time

differences and personnel availability may necessitate the direct link with the

NESDIS database. A PC with modem, an inhouse software program, and the GOES

platform ID are required. The NESDIS database can be accessed by using the

inhouse software package to link with the database, "capture" the data in a file, and

then decode it. The inhouse software package is labeled MDAPSXXX.EXE

(PDAPSXXX.EXE for sites with English units), where the XXX is either AOG, POG,

OSD, or SLL. Each version of the program has its own NESDIS password as

database access may be limited to a finite number of contacts during the course of

a day. When executed, the program calls the NESDIS database in Wallops Island,

VA, and collects the data for a specific GOES platform ID. The program then

automatically decodes the data and sorts it into several different files by data type

so that it may be easily reviewed and validated.

The program is started by typing MDAPSXXX (or PDAPSXXX) and enter. Figure

4-14 shows the menu that will appear on the screen. If the configuration needs to

be changed hit C and enter. To change any values simply type over the information

(partial changes cannot be done) in the highlighted boxes and hit enter. The

Telephone No: area will be the first parameter highlighted. Enter the NESDIS

telephone number in the format appropriate for the area and situation. This will

typically be T-1-804-824-0105. The T tells the modem to use a tone type dial. If

omitted, or replaced by a P, the modem will use a rotary dial. Some stations will not

have tone line service. Commas can be used to enter a slight pause. The User ID:

is specific to each version of the program and usually does not need to be changed.

The Com Port: is either 1 or 2 depending on how the PC is configured. If a device

timeout error message is displayed when attempting to make a call, then the wrong

communications port has been specified. The GOES Platform ID: for the station

being examined must be entered. The File Messages: configuration cannot be

changed. The Baud Rate: must be set for the modem in use (typically 1200 or 2400).

Any changes to the parameters will be written and saved in a file called station.dat.

If the configuration is correct, hit D and enter. The program will automatically dial
JANUARY 1991 61 NGWLMS ILSP

 PPPPPPPPYYDDDHHMMSSQ##-QQQCCCCQQBBBBBMNNNNNNNN@]#$%^&**&$((*N9)!

 #%$867IT098N04V5B^P0Q3984N5PVQ34N[50QV34B5P%08V23QBN&[P05V54O9&&BTD8

 72@[57235Q4W 6S@w$@QX#%$W SC^EDV&RFB$&V^%BR*T(N)@#$%^&*@@@@Q34$M

 @@@$PN8434354Q3RWEST34560P89UNV34PY9B83[B8345PBV1QN345VP5*&#&*^*(T&

 ^C#V^(&B8!#QX@%$CW ^VDBR*T(N@$#C%VE^&BR*NT(MY@X#$%CW ^VE&BR&B&*^#B

 *TB(N)*)(&N!Q$#@XA%W SCE^DV&R*TG(NYHQX@#%$CSW ^EDV&RFB*TGN(%!C$^E&^

 YHMU)JQX@#@@@7VB$W AE^DV&R%$^CVDE&RBF*TGN(YMH#E%VC$@&^RB*T&B*^6

Figure 4-15

NGWLMS Transmission Block

NESDIS. If a busy signal is received, or contact is not made for some other reason,

hit the F10 function key to redial. If a redial is not desired, hit the F1 function key to

terminate the program.

When the NESDIS database is contacted, the user will see the login process scroll

down the screen. There may be some long pauses, but no interaction is required

on the part of the user. Next, blocks of data (mostly in binary code) will scroll across

the screen. Each block represents a separate transmission. Then, individual lines

of characters will appear and be written over multiple times. This is the decoding of

the data blocks. Finally, the program will return to the cursor prompt. 

The program has created several files which hold the captured and decoded data.

Each file can be examined to check that the transmissions are being received within

specified parameters and that the data is valid. Note that these files are written over

each time the program is executed.

The first file created is GOES.MES. This file holds the blocks of undecoded data,

with each block being a discreet transmission. Figure 4-15 shows a typical data

block. Although most of the block is in binary code, there are a few parameters

which may be examined. The PPPPPPPP at the beginning of the block is the GOES

Platform ID. The YYDDDHHMMSS is the year (YY), the julian day (DDD), the hour

(HH), the minute (MM), and the second (SS). This represents the time that the

transmission is received by NESDIS. The seconds place should be between 9-11

seconds after the minute. If not, adjust either the 9000 RTU time or the transmission

time accordingly.

The Q is a NESDIS quality code. It typically is G for good message or ? meaning

there is a parity error. The ## is the GOES signal strength, which should be

between 42 to 48. Around 35 or less, transmissions cannot be received. If the

signal strength is under 42 contact headquarters for direction. At 50 or more,

NESDIS will require that it be reduced. 

The QQQ is another NESDIS quality code, typically 0NN or 1NN. 

The CCCC is the channel where the first three digits are the numeric channel and

the last is the satellite designation (E or W).
JANUARY 1991 62 NGWLMS ILSP

NNNNNNNNYYDDDHHMM PWL PWL PWL PWL PWL PWL PWL PWL PWL PWL SD SD SD

SD SD SD SD SD SD SD OL OL OL OL OL OL OL OL OL OL AT1 AT1 AT1 AT1 AT1 AT1 AT1

AT1 AT1 AT1 AT2 AT2 AT2 AT2 AT2 AT2 AT2 AT2 AT2 AT2

Figure 4-16

Primary Water Level Data

NNNNNNNNYYDDDHHMM BWL BWL SD SD OL OL WAT WAT

Figure 4-17

Backup Water Level Data

The QQ is another NESDIS quality code, typically FF. The BBBBB is the number

of bytes for the transmission. The number of bytes for a full transmission for each

station will vary, depending upon how many sensors are enabled.

Systems transmitting metric units data have an M in the next spot. Systems

transmitting English units data do not have any code identifying it as such.

The NNNNNNNN is the eight digit NGWLMS station number. Verify that it is correct.

The GOES.ERR file holds messages that were short or had parity errors. It contains

the header line (bold print in Figure 4-15) from each defective transmission.

The PWL.DAT file holds the primary water level data and follows the format shown

in Figure 4-16. Each line represents one hour of data and has the NGWLMS station

number (NNNNNNNN) and the date and time (YYDDDHHMM) at the start of each

string. There should be ten primary water level values (PWL), ten standard

deviations (SD), ten outliers (OL), ten upper air temperatures (AT1), and ten lower

air temperatures (AT2). Metric values are reported to the thousandth place and

English units are reported to the hundreth place. Verify that the water level readings

are reasonable. The standard deviation and outliers should reflect the site type, i.e.,

larger values would be expected for an open coast site as opposed to a protected

harbor site. Differences between the two air temperatures should not exceed 5

degrees.

The BWL.DAT file holds the data from the backup water level data and is formatted

similarly to the primary water level data as shown in Figure 4-17. Each line is tagged

with the NGWLMS station number and date/time and has one hours worth of data.

Backup water level is only stored every half-hour, however, in order to conserve

space in the transmission message. Two backup water level (BWL) values follow

the header values, then two standard deviation (SD) values, two outlier (OL) values,

and then two temperature (WAT) values. Compare the backup water level data to

the primary water level data for verification. Check the temperature data to ensure

that the values are reasonable.
JANUARY 1991 63 NGWLMS ILSP

NNNNNNNNYYDDDHHMM RWL RWL RWL RWL RWL RWL RWL RWL RWL RWL

Figure 4-18

Redundant Water Level Data

NNNNNNNNYYDDDHHMMSSSSSDDDDDGGGGGAAAAAW W W W W BBBBBCCCCCEEEEEIIIIIPP

PPPRRRRROOOOO1111122222

Figure 4-19

Ancillary Data

PPPPPPPPQDDDHHMMSSNNNNNNNN 22221111EEERR KKYYDDDHHMM##-QQQCCCCBBB

Figure 4-20

Configuration Data

The RWL.DAT is the redundant primary water level data file. It contains only the

redundant primary water level data values that are contained in each transmission

and is configured as shown in Figure 4-18.

The ANC.DAT file contains data from any ancillary sensors which may be enabled

at the station. Only one value per hour is recorded for each ancillary sensor. Figure

4-19 shows the format. Disabled sensor places are held by 9's. Verify that the

values are reasonable.

SSSSS = Wind Speed

DDDDD = Wind Direction

GGGGG = Wind Gust

AAAAA = Air Temperature

WWWWW = Water Temperature

BBBBB = Barometric Pressure

CCCCC = Water Conductivity

EEEEE = Current Speed

IIIII = Current Direction

PPPPP = Dewpoint

RRRRR = Rainfall

OOOOO = Solar Radiation

11111 = Analog 1

22222 = Analog 2

The last file is STAT.DAT. This file contains the critical values used to configure the

9000 RTU at the station as shown in 4-19. First is the Platform ID (PPPPPPPP),

then a NESDIS quality code (Q), the date/time (DDDHHMMSS) when NESDIS

received the transmission, the NGWLMS station number (NNNNNNNN), the primary

water level Coefficient 2 (2222), the primary water level Coefficient 1 (1111), a

NESDIS status code (EEE), the number of resets (RR), a checksum value (KK), the

starting date/time (YYDDDHHMM) of the transmission, the signal strength (##), a

NESDIS quality code (QQQ), the channel (CCCC), and the transmission byte length

(BBB). Check to ensure that the values are correct or fall within the guidelines.
JANUARY 1991 64 NGWLMS ILSP

NESDIS status codes (EEE) are as follows;

Decimal Value Error Condition

1 ROM Checksum Error

2 RAM Test Error

EE Write Error

RAM Checksum Error

EE Checksum Error

Analog Error

4 SYSTAT Bit 10: SDL Error

SYSTAT Bit 11: TAG Missing Error

8 SYSTAT Bit 8: Term UART Error

SYSTAT Bit 9: Radio UART Error

SYSTAT Bit 12: Missing Board Error

SYSTAT Bit 13: Met Error

SYSTAT Bit 14: GOES Error

16 Battery < 12.5 volts

32 8200 Error

64 Charger voltage < 15.0 volts

128 > 5 sec off sample end - Aquatrak 181 samples

256 >15 sec off sample end - Aquatrak 181 samples

512 8200 time update not enabled

4.2.4 FIELD UNIT GRAPHICS SOFTWARE PROGRAM

Graphically displaying the primary water level data is a quick way to visually check

the field unit performance. The TIDES ABC program, originally developed for on

demand access to a predecessor telemetry system, has been modified to access

data from the NGWLMS. Please note that at this time, TIDES ABC is only capable

of operating with English unit (feet) 9000 RTU's. A metric version has not been

developed. This section will briefly describe the program's support requirements,

capabilities, and operation. The TIDES ABC Users Manual, December 2, 1985,

should be consulted, however, for detailed instructions on how to use the program.

4.2.4-A Support requirements

There are specific hardware and software requirements on both the 9000 RTU and

the user end which must be met if TIDES ABC is to be used to collect and display

the primary sensor water level data. There are also constraints due to the fact that

TIDES ABC is not tailored to NGWLMS.

The 9000 RTU must have the following:

! The 9000 RTU must have version 2.4F of the operating system and

SDL program REV F or later. Earlier versions do not support TIDES

ABC although the appropriate subroutines can be downloaded into

RAM which will allow TIDES ABC to work. 
JANUARY 1991 65 NGWLMS ILSP

! A special password must also be programmed into the 9000 RTU which

allows the TIDES ABC access to the data. 

! The 9000 RTU must have a telephone line or the user must be on site

to communicate with the 9000 RTU.

The user must have a personal computer with the TIDES ABC software program and

a minimum of the following:

! IBM PC/XT/AT or 100% compatible

! 448 kilobytes memory

! 1 double sided, double density, floppy diskette drive (hard disk

recommended)

! Math coprocessor

! HAYES® internal 1200B modem or external modem 

! Graphics cards: any IBM color graphics adapter compatible,

HERCULES® monochrome or compatible, or TECMAR® Graphics

Master in color or monochrome.

Optional hardware is:

! Supported printers are: EPSON® FX80 or compatible, QUADRAM®

QUADJET, or OKIDATA® ML92.

! Parallel printer interface and cable.

4.2.4-B Program operation 

The TIDES ABC program operates by downloading primary water level sensor data

from a remote unit into the personal computer memory and then displaying it in the

specified format. Only the primary water level sensor data can be downloaded.

TIDES ABC was not originally programmed to download the backup water level or

any of the other ancilllary sensor data.

The TIDES ABC program has the following features:

! It is a menu driven program using the function keys. 

! It interrogates a site through the selection of a station from a station

directory. 

! It can compute predicted tides, if harmonic constituents are available.

! It can store up to two months of tidal data and predictions on disk for

each station.

! It corrects the GMT data to local standard time.

! It provides two types graphic displays for one to six days of data:

observed versus predicted data, and anomalies versus predicted data,

where anomalies are the difference between observed and predicted

data.

! Tabular presentations of observed and predicted data.
JANUARY 1991 66 NGWLMS ILSP

Main Menu:

F1 - Interrogate stations

F2 - Graphic and tabular displays

F3 - Configuration and editing

F10 - Terminate program

Figure 4-21

TIDES ABC Main Menu

After the TIDES ABC program is

installed (see manual for details) type

TIDESABC to execute the program.

Figure 4-21 shows the main menu.

There must be a station subdirectory

created to hold each station's

configuration and data files in order to

be able to contact a station and collect

data from it. TIDES ABC creates a

station directory which numbers and lists existing station subdirectories. All functions

request a station reference number before executing that function. Create a

subdirectory named SXXXXXXX, where XXXXXXX is the station number. Put all

configuration files for that station in that subdirectory. Station configuration files are

created using Option F3. Option F3 is password protected so that unauthorized

users cannot corrupt configuration files. There are three configuraton files to

consider. 

The first, the station data file, contains the information listed below. It is important

to know the tidal datums for the site when configuring the station data file. The

station data file contains the following station configuration parameters;

STATION NAME: Name of site

STATION NUMBER: 7-digit site ID number

PHONE NUMBER: Site telephone number

STATION TYPE: NGWLMS or predecessor system (enter a 4)

HIGH LIMIT: Highest expected water level

LOW LIMIT: Lowest expected water level

MAX CHANGE: Highest expected rate of change

GAUGE OFFSET: Value required to reference raw data to datum

STATION DATUM: MSL - MLLW (Used to scale predicted water levels)

DATUM TYPE: Reference datum used (typically MLLW)

GMT OFFSET: Station location time offset to GMT

NUMBER OF DAYS: Number of days of data to be downloaded

The second file is the configuration file which contains information on the PC system

hardware and the TIDES ABC default options. The third file is the constituent file

which contains the harmonic constituents used to generate the predicted tides for

the site. If no harmonic constituents are available the predicted tides will not be

generated and graphed.

Option F1 interrogates the stations to retrieve data. 

Option F2 is used to view the data in various formats (tabular vs. graphic) and

combinations (observed, predicted, anomalies) after it has been retrieved. 

Option F10 exits the program.

Consult the TIDES ABC manual for details on installing and operating the program.
JANUARY 1991 67 NGWLMS ILSP

4.3 NONSTANDARD 9000 RTU CONFIGURATIONS

Sections 4.1 and 4.2 have been dedicated to the installation and initialization of what

has been defined as a standard NGWLMS field unit configuration. In addition to the

standard configuration, however, there are several nonstandard options for

configuring the NGWLMS. This includes substituting different components or

enhancing the unit through the addition of supplemental input/output devices. This

section provides instruction on the installation and operation of nonstandard 9000

RTU configurations.

4.3.1 TSUNAMI WARNING SYSTEM OUTPUT DEVICE

NOS has traditionally cooperated with the NWS in the operation of a tsunami

warning system. Typically, NWS has "piggybacked" NWS equipment onto existing

NOS water level gages to telemeter analog data in real-time to the appropriate

tsunami warning center. NWS requires real time analog water level data averaged

differently than standardly done by the NGWLMS in order to detect tsunami events.

The NGWLMS can be interfaced by NWS through the addition of a computer-toanalog output module that provides a continuous analog output (4-20 ma) of water

level from the primary water level (acoustic) sensor and a SDL subroutine that

continuously samples and averages the water level. 

 

Figure 4-22

Computer-to-Analog Module

to 9000 RTU Wiring Diagram

4.3.1-A Requirements and Installation

The analog output module is a selfcontained computer-to-analog output

interface. The particular unit used is a

model D3251 made by DGH

Corporation® which has a RS232

interface and a 0-20 ma current output.

The D3251 is capable of recognizing

many different commands and

operating in different modes. All the

factory default settings are used and

only the $1AO commmand is used to

set the analog voltage. The format of

this command is $1AO+xxxxx.xx

followed by enter. The value xxxxx.xx

is the desired output in milli-amps. For

complete information on the module

and commands refer to the DGH

D3000/4000 Series Users Manual.

The following hardware/software is required:

! DGH® Model 3251 computer-to-analog interface module or equal.

! SDL program REV E or later.

! Upgrade existing battery to 40 amp-hours or additional 12 volt battery

run in series.
JANUARY 1991 68 NGWLMS ILSP

The module is installed by attaching it to a convenient area inside the lower

compartment of the 9000 RTU. This is usually done with a velcro patch as the

interface module is very light. The module is connected to the top termination board

and the positive terminal of the battery as shown in Figure 4-22.

It will be necessary to upgrade the existing 12 volt battery to 40 amp-hours or install

a second one in series with the first. This is to maintain the backup life of the battery

as the interface module and NWS equipment provide an additional drain on the

system. The second battery will have to be installed exterior to the 9000 RTU. Run

the battery wires in one of the portholes. 

This completes the NOS portion of the tsunami warning system installation. NWS

is responsible for the connection of their equipment to the module.

4.3.1-B Initialization

SDL program REV E (and later) contains the software subroutine required for the

tsunami warning system. The software collects and averages the primary water

level sensor data, transforms it to an output current (milliamps), and writes it to the

module. The software also contains tests for verifying the current output to the

module. The subroutine is activated by going to the NGWLMS MAIN MENU and

selecting the TSUNAMI option (press M). This brings up the screen shown below.

Tsunami Mode: Enabled

Average Interval (sec) XX

Output Slope X.XX

Output Offset X.XX

Last Avg Lvl (ft) XX.XX

Last Output (ma) XX.XX

TSUNAMI Menu

 1 - Enable/Disable Tsunami

 2 - Change Average Interval

 3 - Change Slope

 4 - Change Offset

 5 - Short Test

 6 - Long Test

(Esc to exit)

Enter Choice: 

Set the interval, slope, and offset using options 2 through 4 of the submenu. Be sure

to document the values on the NGWLMS Site Report. The tsunami mode is started

by selecting option 1 and enabling the subroutine. 

Connect an amp meter to use options 5 and 6. Option 5 initiates a short test which

stops the sampling and sends a preset output to the module. The module will first

be set to 4.00 ma, then 12.00, 19.99, 12.00 and back to 4.00. There is a five second

delay between values and the values are displayed on the screen as they are sent.

The short test takes about 30 seconds. Option 6 is like option 5 but is much longer.

The output starts at 4.00 ma and increases by 0.25 ma every 15 seconds until it
JANUARY 1991 69 NGWLMS ILSP

reaches 20.00 ma. It then decreases in a similar fashion. It takes about 30 minutes

to complete option 6. 

The Last Avg Lvl (ft) and Last Output (ma) are the last averaged water level value

and its computed output in milliamps. These values do not automatically update

unless some key other than 1 through 6 is pressed to refresh the screen. Also be

aware that it is possible to catch the values as the program has computed the

average water level but not the current output.

4.3.2 EXTERNAL OUTPUT DISPLAY DEVICE

It is often advantageous at some NOS water level stations to provide a local display

of the real-time water levels and/or ancillary sensors. There may be a need to

provide the information to a local user or as part of a public display. 

Hardware and software requirements are as follows:

! The 9000 RTU must have operating system 2.5B and SDL program

VER G or later. 

! A one or two line, 20 - 24 character LCD panel.

! A 5 volt, 1.5 amp power supply.

 

Figure 4-23

LCD Panel Cable To 9000 RTU

4.3.2-A Installing the LCD panel.

The panel can be packaged in

whatever type of housing is

appropriate for the application. The

panel is connected to its own power

supply to avoid any drain on the 9000

RTU. The power supply can be

packaged in the same housing as the

panel or installed in a separate

location. Figure 4-23 shows the

connection of the LCD panel wires to

termination board 1. 

4.3.2-B Initializing the LCD panel.

Initializing the LCD display panel is a menu selectable item from the operators menu.

Select D - Display and the following menu will appear. Default values for the

parameters are shown. 
JANUARY 1991 70 NGWLMS ILSP

DISPLAY MODE: DISABLED

LOCAL DATUM OFFSET (M) 0

TIME ZONE (e.g. EDT) GMT

TIME OFFSET FROM GMT 0

LAST AVG LVL

1 - Enable/Disable Display

2 - Change Local Datum Offset

3 - Change Time Zone Letters

4 - Change Time Offset

(Esc to Exit)

Enter Choice:

Set the local datum offset by entering 2 at the Enter Choice: prompt. The local

datum offset is the value required to correct the water level computed by the 9000

RTU (water level above station datum) to whatever reference datum (typically

MLLW) is to be displayed. This requires knowing the elevation of that datum relative

to station datum which must be obtained from headquarters.

Select 3 from the menu and enter the 3 letter abbreviation for whatever time zone

is to be displayed. Select 4 and enter the GMT offset. Finally, select 1 and enable

the sensor. The LAST AVG LVL displays the last value that is stored in the log and

to which the local datum offset is applied.

4.3.3 PRESSURE TRANSDUCER PRIMARY WATER LEVEL SENSOR

There are areas where the acoustic sensor, or other types of sensors requiring

protective wells, cannot be used due to the impracticality of installing and maintaining

a protective well. Areas where no vertical support structures exist, that are subject to

heavy ice cover, or that are exposed to severe weather are a few examples. If water

level data are desired at these locations, an option is the use of a pressure transducer

as the primary water level sensor. A pressure transducer can be secured underwater

and only a small tube or cable has to be protected through the air/water interface. 

There are several drawbacks to using pressure transducers that place limitations on

their use. Pressure transducers tend to be less accurate, typically expressed as some

percentage of the range. Variations in water salinity/density introduce inaccuracies.

They are difficult to reference to a bench mark network, as there is no well defined

sensor zero that can be easily surveyed to. Transducers tend to drift over time.

Finally, they are very susceptible to marine fouling (if deployed directly in water - see

below for alternatives) and failure when they remain in the ocean for extended periods.

A Paroscientific Digiquartz® is used when a pressure transducer is the primary

sensor, due to its high accuracy specification and stable drift characteristics. Special

software is being written at this time which will allow the Paroscientific to also be

selected as a GROUP 1 (six minute data) sensor. Current software allows selection

only as a GROUP 2 (hourly data) sensor. This modification will allow the

Digiquartz® to collect six minute averaged water level data similar to the acoustic

sensor. Both the acoustic sensor and Digiquartz® can operate as primary sensors

at the same time.
JANUARY 1991 71 NGWLMS ILSP

The software will be implemented through a SDL program chip change and will

convert the ancillary sensor slot to a Group 1 status. The software change is not yet

ready at this date, but will be the change following SDL program Version G. It is

recommended that the Engineering Note accompanying the software program

change be consulted for additional information not available at the time of this

manual. 

4.3.3-A Site preparation

The Digiquartz® can be deployed in two different configurations, similarly to the

backup sensor. The first configuration (direct) is to deploy the Digiquartz® in the

water. The second configuration (idirect) is to install a standard buabbler orifice,

purge system, and nitrogen tank and use the Digiquartz® to measure the changes

in line pressure caused by the change in hydrostatic pressure over the orifice. The

purge system and Digiquartz® are typically housed in a separate NEMA enclosure

about the same size as the 8200 data recorder. A temperature sensor must be

installed adjacent to the Digiquartz®, similar to the backup sensor.

The Digiquartz® is available in several models. The 8000 series incorporates the

pressure transducer into a self contained, stainless steel, shock resistant, sealed

pressure case, submersible unit that is suitable for direct deployment in the water.

The 2000 series is better suited for the indirect configuration due to the facility with

which it can be interfaced with the gas pressure lines, its smaller size, and rugged

design. The 8000 series model can be used for either configuration, while the 2000

series model can only be used for the indirect configuration.

NOS does not have any standard auxillary components to support the Digiquartz®

if the direct configuration is selected, therefore, a custom installation must be

designed. A Digiquartz® deployed as a primary water level sensor must be installed

so that the sensor zero (bottom of the sensor) can be referenced to the bench mark

network (unless a tide staff and observer configuration is used). This is generally

accomplished by designing a mounting board that allows a measurement to be

made between the sensor zero and an accessible rod stop. The sensor cable

should be protected against the environment. A water temperature sensor (standard

YSI) shall be installed adjacent to the Digiquartz®. It is recommended that a

sacrificial anode be attached to the Digiquartz® (a threaded slot is provided) and that

the sensor body be coated with antifouling paint to retard marine growth. 

If the indirect configuration is selected, a standard fiberglassed brass bubbler orifice

mounting board can be installed and the neoprene tubing run up to the instrument

shelter. The brass orifice must be equipped with parallel plates. The shelter houses

the nitrogen tank, regulator, and a NEMA enclosure. The NEMA enclosure contains

a gas manifold with control panel, the Digiquartz®, and an air temperature sensor.

The Digiquartz® is connected to an undampened section of gas line and monitors

the line pressure. The NEMA enclosure configuration is called a Digibub. 

It is recommended that a conductivity sensor be installed in conjunction with the

Digiquartz®, so that the water level data may be corrected for temperature and

density, particularly in areas subject to large variations in salinity.
JANUARY 1991 72 NGWLMS ILSP

4.3.3-B Installation

If the direct configuration is selected

the Digiquartz® and temperature

sensor cables are run through conduit

and connected directly to the 9000

RTU as detailed below. If the indirect

configuration is selected, the Digibub

is mounted on the shelter wall,

following the same mounting criteria as

specified for the 9000 RTU. 

Connect the Digiquartz® to the 9000

RTU as shown in Figure 4-24. Note

that the red sensor wire must be

connected to the positive (+) terminal

of the 9000 RTU power stepdown

board with an inline 5 amp fuse. The

fuse shall be located in the 9000 RTU

compartment, not the pressure

transducer NEMA box.

Connect the temperature sensor with

the Digiquartz® to the 9000 RTU as

shown in Figure 4-25.

4.3.3-C Initilization

Access the 9000 RTU using a PC and

initialize the Digiquartz® as follows:

! Enter the three coefficients for

the Digiquartz®. The coefficients are

specific to each sensor and are on a

calibration sheet supplied with each

sensor. They are:

Coefficient #1 = A

Coefficient #2 = B

Coefficient #3 = T0

.

Figure 4-24

Paroscientific to 9000 RTU

Figure 4-25

Paroscientific Temperature Cable

to 9000 RTU

! Enter the temperature coefficient: Coefficient #1 = 29400 (2.94000E+004)

! Enable the Digiquartz® (Paroscientific) sensor listed under GROUP 1 and the

Analog 2 sensor listed under GROUP 2. The temperature sensor associated

with the Digiquartz® use the Analog 2 channel.

Sensor output for the Digiquartz® is in meters, and degrees centigrade for the

temperature sensor.
JANUARY 1991 73 NGWLMS ILSP

he Digibub is operated the same as conventional bubbler gauge pressure manifolds

with one exception. Consult the Bubbler Gage Users Guide listed in the reference

section for further information on normal bubbler gage operation and maintenance.

The exception is an extra valve labeled "VENT FOR CALIBRATION" on the control

panel. It is used only for periodic calibration of the Digibub and should be kept

closed during normal operation. 

The Digibub can be calibrated by recording the zero pressure offset of the pressure

transducer. Zero pressure checks help monitor the long term stability of the

Digiquartz® and provide a means of data correction. The checks should be

performed upon installation and during maintenances. Perform the checks as

follows:

! During normal operation, close the inlet valve.

! Close the outlet valve.

! Open the "VENT FOR CALIBRATION" valve.

! Record a minimum of five 6-minute readings to ensure the Digiquartz® is fully

vented to the atmosphere.

! Return to normal operation by reversing the previous steps.

CAUTION: The green NUPRO bellow valves will be fully open after one to one and

a half turns. Turning beyond this point may cause the cap to come off.

Record the results under the additional sensor tests section on the Sensor Test

Worksheet.

4.3.4 CELLULAR TELEPHONE

In areas where the site is not near a telephone line, but is covered by a cellular

telephone network, it may be more economical to install a cellular telephone than to

bring in telephone lines. Installation is similar to a regular telephone line in that the

wire connections are the same. Connect the wires to ring and tip on termination

board 1 as shown in Figure 4-11 in Section 4.1.7-C.

The cellular telephone should have its own power supply, and not draw from the

9000 RTU, to avoid shortening the 9000 RTU's stand alone battery life in the event

of an AC and/or solar panel power failure. 

Note that the telephone is cellular on the NGWLMS Site Report.

4.3.5 RADIO COMMUNICATION

Another option for receiving data and communicating with the 9000 RTU is through

line of sight radio. This option may be selected if there is a need for real time water

level data from a site. It is also another way to communicate with a remote site that

cannot be connected to telephone service. The 9000 RTU operating system can be

accessed over the radio and all functions executed, such as changing coefficients,

setting time, downloading software, etc.. The radio communications option can

operate in conjunction with the GOES satellite transmissions, or become the primary

data collection path.
JANUARY 1991 74 NGWLMS ILSP

A radio communications board, software, antenna, transmitter and receiver are

required. As of this edition, however, the radio communications option is not in

standard use by NOS. Therefore, menu selections to configure and enable the radio

are not in the present software. Contact headquarters for further information if the

radio option may be required for a remote site or special application.
JANUARY 1991 75 NGWLMS ILSP

WIND BAROMETRIC PRESSURE

AIR TEMPERATURE SOLAR RADIATION

DEW POINT RAINFALL

WATER CURRENT + WATER CONDUCTIVITY*

WATER TEMPERATURE PAROSCIENTIFIC*

ANALOG 1 FREQUENCY 1*

ANALOG 2 FREQUENCY 2 +

+, * - Cannot operate simultaneously with each other

Table 7

Ancillary Sensors

5 ANCILLARY SENSORS

In addition to the standard primary (acoustic plus two air temperature) and backup

(pressure plus temperature) water level sensors, the NGWLMS 9000 RTU can

accommodate other meteorologic and oceanographic ancillary sensors. This

chapter provides guidelines for ancillary sensor site preparation, installation

procedures, and documentation requirements. 

Table 7 lists the 14 ancillary sensor types which may be operated with the 9000

RTU. Note that only 11 of the 14 can operate simultaneously as some of the

sensors use the same input channels. Some of the sensors (highlighted in Table 7)

are capable of measuring more than one parameter, i.e., the wind sensor measures

wind speed, direction, and gusts. NOS has selected specific manufacturers'

instruments for some of the sensor options, and the siting/installation information in

this document is directed towards them. To date, specific instrumentation has not

been selected for the remainder of the sensor options, so little information has been

provided for these. Future revisions of the manual will address these sensors as

instrumentation is specified.

Proper siting of the ancillary sensors, particularly for the meteorological sensors,

may be difficult to achieve in some cases. The main objective of siting a sensor is

to ensure that the data being collected will satisfy program requirements. This

usually requires that the data be representative of the conditions typical for the area.

Criteria will be provided for siting each sensor, however, an ideal location that meets

all the criteria may not be possible. In these cases compromises will be necessary.

The installer must consider the purposes of the data collection program and select

a site that will best meet the objectives.

In general, siting criteria for the meteorological sensors have been taken from the

Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems: Volume IV -

Meteorological Measurements (see References).
JANUARY 1991 76 NGWLMS ILSP

5.1 WIND SENSOR

The wind sensor used with the 9000 RTU is the Wind Monitor Model 05103

manufactured by the R. M. Young Company. See Appendix E.1 for manufacturer

information. It measures wind speed and direction. It has a helicoid shaped four

blade propeller molded of polypropylene plastic for wind speed and a vane assembly

whose position is transmitted through a coupling located in the main housing for

wind direction. 

5.1.1 SITING CRITERIA

Because atmospheric properties can vary considerably with height, and be affected

by surrounding obstructions, a set of somewhat arbitrary conventions have been

established so that measurements conducted at different locations can be compared

on a common basis. 

! The standard mounting elevation is 10 m (30 ft) above the ground in

open, level, terrain. 

! A horizontal distance of ten times the height of an obstruction should be

maintained, between the wind sensor and the obstruction, for the

surrounding area to be considered open terrain. An obstruction can be

manmade (building) or natural (tree).

! If the sensor is to be mounted on the roof of a building, it should be

mounted at a height 1.5 times the height of the building. This is to

remove the sensor from the area in which the air flow is affected by the

building. For tall buildings where this guideline cannot be met, a 3 to

5 m (10 to 15 ft) mast should be mounted on the side of the building

with the prevailing wind.

! If the sensor is to be mounted on a tower, the sensor should be above

the tower or on a boom. The boom should be twice as long as the

maximum diameter or diagonal of the tower, and should be directed

into the prevailing wind.

The above criteria are primarily meant for inland based measurements and may be

difficult to fully meet at the typical NGWLMS site. Completely satisfying them may

not be critical, however, as coastal locations typically generate sea/land breezes

which can dominate the wind patterns. It is this cyclical pattern that should govern

the wind sensor placement at most sites. The above criteria can be still be used as

guidance for the sensor placement, but must be adapted to coastal sites. For

example, the seaward end of a pier might represent the best wind sensor site for a

pier station.

In general, a meteorological tower will probably provide the best platform from which

to conduct wind measurements, as well as other meteorological parameters. The

tower should be of the open grid type of construction that will not twist, rotate, or

sway. Enclosed towers, stacks, storage tanks, grain elevators, cooling towers, etc.,

should not be used. See Section 5.12 for further details on meteorological towers.
JANUARY 1991 77 NGWLMS ILSP

 A12+ A12- GND I2 +5V CTR1

 (15) (16) (17) (18) (19) (20)

9000 TERMINATION BOARD 3

5.1.2 INSTALLATION

The Model 05013 wind sensor clamps onto a standard 2.5 cm (1 inch) diameter iron

pipe which can be mounted onto a mast, tower, tower boom, or whatever support

structure has been selected at the site. The sensor should initially be loosely

clamped onto the pipe as it will need to be aligned with regard to direction, however,

this must be done after connection to the 9000 RTU.

 | | | |

 || | |

KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK

 G B W R

 R L H E

 E A I D

 E C T

 N K E

 - Denotes 100 - 150 K Ohm Resistor KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK

WIND SENSOR CABLE

Figure 5-1

Wind Sensor Cable to 9000 RTU

Figure 5-1 is the wiring

diagram for connecting the

wind sensor into the 9000

RTU. The green wire is the

direction, the white is for

direction excitation, and the

red is for speed. A 100 - 150

K ohm resistor is required

due to the potentiometer in

use for the direction output

having an open section

(dead spot) of 5 degrees.

The pull down resistor will

avoid erratic readings when

the direction is at this open

section. 

Enable the sensor and enter the two wind sensor coefficients. Coefficient 1 is

0.09778 (9.77800E-002) and coefficient 2 is 355 (3.55000E+002). The sensor

output is in m/sec and degrees. To convert wind speed from m/sec to miles/hour,

multiply the indicated speed by 2.24.

The wind sensor must be aligned with regard to direction. 

! Align the vane by pointing it toward a distant reference point of known

azimuth, or use a compass (correct for magnetic deviation), and sight

along the centerline of the sensor. 

! While the vane is held in position, the mounting post assembly is slowly

turned on the mounting pipe until the 9000 RTU indicates the proper

heading. It is usually easiest to sight from the propeller end toward the

fin, with the output reading 180 from the reference point. O

! Once the sensor is properly oriented, the SS band clamp on the

mounting post is tightened. 

! The orientation ring is raised and its indexing pin engaged in the notch

on the bottom of the sensor mounting post. While holding the

orientation ring in position, the remaining band clamp is tightened. The

index notch on the mounting post was aligned at due south by the

manufacturer.
JANUARY 1991 78 NGWLMS ILSP

Figure 5-2

Barometric Sensor Installation

5.1.3 DOCUMENTATION

Documentation for the wind sensor installation should, at a minimum, provide the

following information:

! Installation date

! Sensor serial number

! Cable length

! Full description of physical installation, including: support structure

(mast, tower, building, etc.), sensor elevation above grade, orientation

of tower boom, surrounding obstructions, etc.

5.2 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR

The barometric pressure sensor used with the 9000 RTU is a SETRA Systems, Inc.

Model 270 pressure transducer. See Appendix E.2 for manufacturer information.

Early models were modified by NOS with a 24 VDC to 12 VDC converter (a small

circuit board attached to the sensor) while later models use 12 VDC directly. A

minor software change was required to accommodate the later model. This software

change is present in those 9000 RTUs operating with SDL program version REV F

or later. The early model can be used with version REV F or later software but the

wiring connections are different and a wire jumper is required. 

5.2.1 SITING CRITERIA

Site selection is not required for the sensor as it is mounted inside the 9000 RTU

and vented to the outside. 

5.2.2 INSTALLATION

The sensor is mounted inside the lower

portion of the 9000 RTU using a

modified bracket assembly. The bracket

supplied with the barometric sensor from

SETRA is turned around (see Figure 5-

2) and has two 3/8 diameter inch holes

drilled 1-1/4 inch apart to match the

9000 porthole configuration. Two 5/16 x

2 inch threaded bolts with nut and

washers (lock and flat) along with three

porthole plugs complete the assembly.

The assembly uses the top row of 9000

RTU portholes to attach the bracket and

a lower porthole to vent the sensor.

Install the sensor as follows:

! Remove the top two front

porthole plugs. Also remove

the third from the top, front row, porthole plug. Save the black backing

nuts from all three.
JANUARY 1991 79 NGWLMS ILSP

 A1+ A1- GND +5V A4+ <--> A7- GND +12V

 (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (11) (12) (13)

 TERMINATION BOARD 1

! Mount the three porthole plugs (from assembly) into the three portholes

cleared in the first step. Use the backing nuts to attach the porthole plugs

to the bulkhead.

! Insert the two bolts into the top two porthole plugs from the outside and

hand tighten the plug glands.

! Mount the sensor bracket onto the bolts and thread a flat washer, lock

washer, and nut onto each bolt, and tighten.

! Feed the tygon tube down and out the lower porthole. Do not allow the

tube to sag inside the 9000 RTU so that moisture cannot collect in a low

point. Hand tighten the plug gland cut the tube flush with the plug end.

! It is critical that the sensor, including the bracket, is not touching the

bulkhead so that it is electrically isolated from the 9000 RTU. The backing

nut part of the porthole plug will accomplish this if the above assembly

procedure is correctly followed.

! Connect the sensor wires as shown in Figure 5-3. Use the top half of the

diagram for the later model and the bottom half for the earlier. NOTE:

Figure 5-3 assumes a SDL program version REV F or later. 

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR

(Without DC to DC converter)

 G W B

 R H L

 E I A R

 E T C E

 N E K D

 | | | |

 | | | |

 | | | |

 | | | |

JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ

Y B R

E R E

L O D

L W

O N

W

- Denotes wire jumper JJJJJJJJJJJ 

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE SENSOR

(With DC to DC converter)

Figure 5-3

Barometric Sensor Cable to 9000 RTU

! Enable the sensor and enter the coefficients: Coefficient 1 = 60

(6.00000E+001) and Coefficient 2 = 800 (8.00000E+002).

The sensor output is in millibars. To convert to inches of mercury, multiply the

indicated pressure by 0.02992. 
JANUARY 1991 80 NGWLMS ILSP

5.2.3 CALIBRATION

The barometric pressure sensor readings should be calibrated by one of two

methods. If a NWS weather office is nearby, call and conduct some simultaneous

readings. Alternately, compare the readings to a previously calibrated hand held

portable barometer. The readings can be adjusted by changing Coefficient 2. For

example, if the readings are 1.2 mbar higher than the reference, change Coeffcient

2 to 798.8. 

5.2.4 DOCUMENTATION

Installation and calibration information shall be documented on the NGWLMS Site

Report and the Sensor Test Worksheet and, at a minimum, provide the following:

! Sensor serial number and model type (early vs present)

! Calibration method and results.

! Coefficient 2 if different than 800.

5.3 AIR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The air temperature sensor used with the 9000 RTU is a YSI Model 44032 (-40 to O

+50 C) installed in conjunction with the R. M. Young Company Gill Multi-plate O

Model 41002 radiation shield. See Appendix E.3 for manufacturer information.

5.3.1 SITING CRITERIA

Air temperature is another meteorologic property that can change considerably with

height and can be affected by surroundings. The following criteria are also meant

for inland sites, but can be used as general guidelines.

! Standard mounting elevation is 1.2 to 2.0 m (4.0 to 6.5 ft) above grade.

! The sensor should be mounted over a plot of open level ground at least 9

m (30 ft) in diameter. The ground beneath the sensor should be short

grass or natural earth, not asphalt, concrete, areas of standing water, etc..

! The distance between the sensor and any obstruction should be at least

4 times the height of the obstruction. It should be at least 30 m (100 ft)

from large paved areas and not close to steep slopes.

! If mounted on a tower, the sensor should be on a tower boom at least as

long as the tower diameter.

! Temperature sensors should have downward facing aspirated shields.

Clearly, a pier based site cannot meet some of the above criteria. In those cases,

the sensor should be sited out over the water (on a tower boom) or as close to the

edge of the pier as possible.

5.3.2 CALIBRATION

First, test the air temperature sensor in conjunction with the other thermistors as

described in Section 4.1.1-D. Enable it as a GROUP 1 sensor so that it will log a

value every six minutes. Figure 5-4 shows the wiring connection.
JANUARY 1991 81 NGWLMS ILSP

 +5V A2+ A2- GND

 (1) (2) (3) (4)

TERMINATION BOARD 2 5.3.3 INSTALLATION

The air temperature sensor is housed

in an aspirated radiation shield. The

purpose is to keep direct sunlight off

the sensor yet still allow adequate

ventilation. The radiation shield has a

hex plug in the bottom machined to a

1.4 cm diameter to grip the YSI

thermistor. The radiation shield

bracket attaches with a u-clamp to a

vertical standard 1 inch diameter iron

pipe. Earlier versions could be

threaded onto the end of a standard 1

inch diameter pipe with threaded end.

Install the sensor as follows:

 | | |

 | | |

KKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKKK

 B W S

 L H H

 A I I

 C T E

 K E L

 D

 - Denotes 29.4 k ohm resistor connection KKKKKKKKKKKKKK

AIR TEMPERATURE CABLE

Figure 5-4

Air Temperature Cable to 9000 RTU

! Install the sensor/radiation shield and protective conduit. 

! Pull the sensor cable through the conduit to the 9000 RTU.

! Connect the temperature cable as shown in Figure 5-4.

! Enable the air temperature sensor as a GROUP 2 sensor. 

! Enter Coefficient 1 = 29400 (2.94000E+004).

Sensor output is in centigrade. Convert to fahrenheit by (9/5 × C) + 32 = F. O

5.3.4 DOCUMENTATION

Installation and testing information shall be documented on the NGWLMS Site

Report and the Sensor Test Worksheet and, at a minimum, provide the following:

! Record sensor test results.

! Document cable length, and mounting method.

! Describe the physical installation with regard to compliance with the criteria

listed above. Provide the elevation above grade.

5.4 SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR

No sensor has been specified at this time

5.4.1 SITING CRITERIA

Measurements should be taken in a location free from any obstructions that could

cast a shadow onto the sensor and not be near any light colored walls or any other

surfaces likely to reflect sunlight. Artificial sources of radiation should also be

avoided. 

5.4.2 INSTALLATION

To be determined.
JANUARY 1991 82 NGWLMS ILSP

5.4.3 DOCUMENTATION

To be determined.

5.5 DEWPOINT SENSOR

No sensor has been specified at this time

5.5.1 SITING CRITERIA

Siting criteria considerations for the dewpoint sensor are identical to the air

temperature sensor. An aspirated radiation shield is also required for this sensor.

5.5.2 INSTALLATION

To be determined.

5.5.3 DOCUMENTATION

To be determined.

5.6 RAINFALL SENSOR

No sensor has been specified at this time.

5.6.1 SITING CRITERIA

The rainfall sensor should be located so that it is shielded from the wind, but not

placed in an area where excessive turbulence may develop. Other general criteria

are as follows:

! It should be mounted on level ground.

! Obstructions to the rainfall sensor should not be closer than two to four

times the height of the obstruction.

! The ground surface around the sensor should be natural. Paved surfaces

may allow water to splash into the sensor.

! The sensor should be mounted a minimum of 0.3 m (1.0 ft) above grade

and high enough so that it will not be covered by snow.

! A wind shield should be used in open areas.

5.6.2 INSTALLATION

To be determined.

5.6.3 DOCUMENTATION

To be determined.
JANUARY 1991 83 NGWLMS ILSP

5.7 WATER CURRENT SENSOR

No sensor has been specified at this time. The water current sensor input is

designed to accept a speed and direction signal. Note that the water current sensor

cannot be operated if the Frequency 2 sensor option is also to be utilized.

5.7.1 SITING CRITERIA

Siting criteria for the water current sensor are dependent upon the objectives of the

data collection program under which the sensor is being deployed. In general, water

current varies with depth and can be significantly altered by obstructions, therefore,

these factors must be considered in siting the sensor.

! The sensor shall be mounted below the lowest expected water level plus

a wave allowance so that there is no chance that it will ever be exposed or

subjected to "surf" conditions.

! The sensor should be offset as much as possible from any obstructions

which could alter the flow in the area of interest.

5.7.2 INSTALLATION

To be determined.

5.7.3 DOCUMENTATION

To be determined.

5.8 WATER CONDUCTIVITY SENSOR

The water conductivity sensor used by the 9000 RTU is the Sea-Bird Electronics,

Inc., Model SBE 4-01 conductivity meter. See Appendix E.8 for manufacturer

information. The sensor has a flow through cell (sensing element) where resistance

is measured. Note that the water conductivity sensor cannot be operated if a

Paroscientific water pressure sensor, or a sensor using the Frequency 1 sensor

option, is to be operated due to conflicts with input channels.

5.8.1 SITING CRITERIA

Conductivity is measured primarily to determine salinity, therefore the sensor should

be located in an area representative of the larger area as a whole. 

! The sensor should be mounted below the lowest expected water level

(plus wave allowance), discussed in Section 2.3.2, so that it is never

exposed to air or "surf" conditions.

! The sensor should not be sited near any freshwater outflows or any other

types of discharges that could change the conductive property of the water

over a limited area.

! Proximity to metal or other materials will not affect the measurements,

unless galvanic corrosion is occurring in the immediate vicinity.
JANUARY 1991 84 NGWLMS ILSP

5.8.2 INSTALLATION

The conductivity sensor is a cylinder, approximately 20 cm (8 inches) long and 5 cm

(2 inches) in diameter. There is a guard bracket which jackets the cylinder for

mounting and protects the conductivity cell. The sensor has a zinc anode attached

to it to protect the anodized aluminum housing. An anti-foulant (tributylin) is used to

keep marine growth from fouling the conductivity cell.

! Attach the guard bracket to whatever backing board has been fabricated.

! Place the anti-foulant into the tygon tube as per manufacturers directions.

! Fasten the meter to the cell guard bracket.

! Install the backing board/meter assembly

! Connect the sensor cable to the 9000 RTU as shown in Figure 5-5.

! Enable the sensor and enter the coefficients. The coefficients are provided

by the manufacturer and are found on the calibration certificate that should

accompany the sensor. The five coefficients (a, b, c, d, m) that are specific

to each sensor correspond respectively to the 9000 RTU coefficients 1-5.

Conductivity output displayed in the 9000 RTU is in Siemans/meter.

Figure 5-5

Water Conductivity Sensor Cable to 9000 RTU

5.8.3 DOCUMENTATION

At a minimum, provide the following:

! Serial number. ! Cable length.

! Mounting configuration description ! Sensor depth.

! The five coefficients.

! Potential discharge "contamination" problems, including natural causes

(rivers, creeks, etc.).
JANUARY 1991 85 NGWLMS ILSP

5.9 WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR

The water temperature sensor used as an ancillary sensor with the 9000 RTU is a

YSI Model 44032 (-5 to +40 C). See Appendix E.9 for manufacturer information. O O

Although it is similar to the temperature sensor supplied with the backup sensor, the

cable lengths and connectors are different. The water temperature sensor is

intended to be redundant to the backup sensor temperature sensor (if deployed

underwater) and is configured to be installed in the protective well.

5.9.1 SITING CRITERIA

The water temperature sensor is to be sited inside the protective well, as specified

in the following section, unless there are instructions to install it in some other

manner. This may occur where it is not possible to install a protective well and the

Paroscientific Digiquartz® sensor is used instead. If the configuration is used where

the Digiquartz® is not deployed underwater, then the water temperature sensor

should be mounted as close to the bubbler orifice as possible. Be sure not to install

it near an outflow, discharge, or any other situation which might affect the water

temperature over a limited area, resulting in nonrepresentative data.

5.9.2 CALIBRATION

First, test the water temperature

sensor as described in Section 4.1.1-

D. Note that if the sensor is hooked up

and enabled as the water temperature

sensor, it will only log a value once

every hour. If there is no air

temperature sensor at the station,

hook the water temperature sensor up

as the air and enable it as a GROUP 1

sensor so that six minute values will be

logged. If this is not possible, wire the

sensor as shown in Figure 5-6, and the

values will have to be monitored in real

time.

Figure 5-6

Water Temperature Cable to 9000 RTU

5.9.3 INSTALLATION

The water temperature sensor cable is 10 m (30 ft) in length with a water proof

connector. The water temperature sensor shall be attached 0.2 m (0.5 ft) above the

end of the brass antifouling tube. Be sure to use a non-metallic method, such as

plastic tie wraps, to attach the sensor to the tube to avoid galvanic corrosion. 

The cable mating connectors should be positioned in the protective well similar to

the air temperature and acoustic sensor mating cable connectors. The water

temperature sensor mating cable is 15 m (50 ft) in length and shall run in conduit

between the protective well and the 9000 RTU. 
JANUARY 1991 86 NGWLMS ILSP

! Connect the water temperature sensor cable to the 9000 RTU as shown

in Figure 5-6. Note that the water temperature sensor does not require a

resistor, as opposed to the water temperature sensor associated with the

backup water level sensor.

! Enable the water temperature sensor as a GROUP 2 sensor.

! Enter Coefficient 1 = 29400 (2.94000E+004).

The sensor output is in degrees centigrade. Convert to degrees fahrenheit by (9/5

× C) + 32 = F. O

5.9.4 DOCUMENTATION

Installation and testing information shall be documented on the NGWLMS Site

Report and the Sensor Test Worksheet. At a minimum, provide the following:

! Sensor elevation.

! Sensor test results.

! Mounting configuration description if other than sounding tube attachment.

5.10 WATER PRESSURE (PAROSCIENTIFIC) SENSOR

The water pressure sensor selected for use as an ancillary sensor with the 9000

RTU is the Paroscientific, Inc., Digiquartz® depth sensor. See Appendix E.10 for

manufacturer information. It is the same sensor that can be used as an alternative

primary water level sensor (see Section 4.3.3), however, in this capacity it is only

collecting one sample per hour. 

5.10.1 SITING CRITERIA

Siting criteria for the water pressure sensor will depend upon the program objectives

under and the configuration selected (direct versus indirect measurement). In

general, the water pressure sensor should be sited using the same criteria as the

backup water level pressure sensor. The primary consideration should be that the

sensor/orifice is mounted below the lowest expected water level (plus a wave

allowance), described in Section 2.3.2, so that there is no chance that it will ever be

exposed or subjected to "surf" conditions.

5.10.2 INSTALLATION 

The water pressure sensor/orifice shall be securely mounted on a backing board

fabricated for the location. If a leveling reference is required, the standard bubbler

or backup sensor mounting board assembly can be used with some modification to

the sensor mounting block. 

! If sited underwater, the Digiquartz® shall have a sacrificial zinc anode

attached to it. It has an unified fine thread opening (1/4 inch, 28

thread/inch) for this purpose.

! Connect the water pressure sensor cable as shown in Figure 5-7 (NOTE:

Awaiting final wiring configuration from OSD - see section 4.3.3).
JANUARY 1991 87 NGWLMS ILSP

5.10.3 DOCUMENTATION

At a minimum, provide the following:

! Serial number.

! Mounting configuration description.

! Cable length.

! Sensor depth.

5.11 ANALOG 1, 2 AND FREQUENCY 1, 2 SENSORS

Any type of sensor that uses an analog or frequency type counter can be connected

to the 9000 RTU as an ancillary sensor. Siting and installation requirements for

selected instruments will be provided as program needs arise.

5.11.1 SITING CRITERIA

To be determined.

5.11.2 INSTALLATION

To be determined.

5.11.3 DOCUMENTATION

To be determined.

5.12 METEOROLOGICAL TOWERS

Two types of towers have been procured to be used as support structures for the

appropriate ancillary sensors. One type is the ROHN® 25G equilateral triangular

design tower which is composed of connectable 3 m (10 ft) lengths of hot dip

galvanized steel. The other type is the Shakespeare Company® 6 m (20 ft) round

tapered fiberglass masts. The triangular towers are to be installed hinged at the

bottom so that the towers can be tilted and lowered to the ground for easy

maintenance access to the sensors. The fiberglass masts are light enough to unbolt

at the base and lower to the ground. An advantage of the fiberglass mast is that it

is more easily accepted in areas where appearance is a concern.

Siting the towers may be very difficult as essentially two sets of criteria must be

considered: first, the tower must be installed in accordance with the criteria listed

below, and second, the site must also satisfy the criteria for the ancillary sensor(s)

that the tower shall support. Criteria for siting the towers shall take priority, however,

as the tower siting criteria are safety related.
JANUARY 1991 88 NGWLMS ILSP

5.12.1 STEEL TOWER SITING CRITERIA

It is important to site the steel towers very carefully as they are great conductors of

electricity. Always consider what will the tower hit if it should fail and collapse.

! The tower location shall be sufficiently clear and out of falling distance of

utility lines. Safe distance from utility lines is defined as at least twice the

height of the highest point of the tower.

! A location that will allow the use of a "house bracket is preferred as this will

allow the tower to be erected without guy wires, up to 10 m (30 ft) above

the house bracket height. The house bracket should be mounted at least

4 m (12 ft) above grade to be effective. If only a standard instrument

shelter is available, mount the bracket as high as possible.

! A location that will allow a clear line of ground space so that the tower can

be fully lowered for maintenance access to the sensor(s).

5.12.2 FIBERGLASS TOWER SITING CRITERIA

Fiberglass masts are not the conductors that the steel towers are but the major

concern is to avoid having a failed tower create a safety hazard.

! The mast location shall be sufficiently clear and out of falling distance of

utility lines. Safe distance from utility lines is defined as at least twice the

height of the highest point of the tower.

! A location that will allow the mast to be firmly bolted at the base, e.g.,

through bolted to a pier support member, never the decking. If only

decking is available, a steel plate equal or larger than the mast baseplate

shall be placed on the underside of the decking and the base bolts run

through it to distribute the stresses. 

! A location that will allow a clear line of ground space so that the mast can

be fully lowered for maintenance access to the sensor(s).
JANUARY 1991 89 NGWLMS ILSP

6. SITE DOCUMENTATION 

 

Documentation of a NGWLMS installation shall be accomplished through the use of

standard forms and thorough annotation of all deviations in site selection, testing,

installation, maintenance activities, and repairs conducted. The traceability and

trackability of the data are of the utmost importance and shall not be compromised.

Standard forms and tools developed for documentation are as follows:

! NGWLMS Site Report.

! NGWLMS Well/Sounding Tube Worksheet.

! Sensor Test Worksheet.

! 9000 RTU Log Book (onsite).

! Software.

6.1 NGWLMS SITE REPORT

The NGWLMS Site Report (see Figures 6-1A,B) is a form developed to fully

document NGWLMS site installations, operation, and maintenance. The form

addresses most significant aspects of the site, including location, local contact,

shelter, utilities, components, equipment, sensors, leveling, etc. The report is to be

completely filled out at installation and annual inspections. If module serial numbers

are not on the front panels, use the serial numbers recorded in the log book, rather

than removing the modules. Record ancillary sensor documentation and any

deviations, non-standard parts or procedures utilized, or field modifications

performed.

 

6.2 NGWLMS WELL/SOUNDING TUBE WORKSHEET

The NGWLMS Well/Sounding Tube Worksheet (see Figure 6-2) shall be submitted

with the installation station report. The worksheet which was used to design the

installation could be modified, if necessary, to show the "as-built" installation, or a

separate drawing may be submitted. The worksheet/drawing shall provide the

elevations, on the existing staff/ETG, of:

! Harbor bottom. 

! Pier deck(s), platform floors, etc. 

! Protective well features (top, bottom, couplers, vent holes, brackets,

parallel plates). 

! Sounding tube features (top, bottom, temperature sensors, cal tube

hole, brass/cpvc junction). 

! Backup sensor assembly features (staff stop, sensor, backing board

top/bottom). 

! Datums (highest & lowest observed/expected tides, MHHW, MLLW).

! Any other information deemed relevant.



JANUARY 1991 93 NGWLMS ILSP

NGWLMS WELL/SOUNDING TUBE WORKSHEET INSTRUCTIONS

 

The worksheet is intended for use in designing and documenting the protective

well/sounding tube lengths and elevations. One copy should be used to design the

well/sounding tube installation at each site, and a second "as-built" copy submitted

to document the installation. The worksheet is divided into two parts, a configuration

side and an elevation side. The configuration side provides a conceptual sketch of

the well/sounding tube with the predetermined measurements noted. It addresses

the overall length of the well. The elevation side addresses the relationship of the

well/sounding tube to the support structure and to the relevant water level datums.

 

 

Two types of information are required to design the well/sounding tube. First, the

relevant water level datums such as lowest and highest expected/observed water

levels, with a wave allowance applied, should be known. The great diurnal tide

range (Gt) is required to compute the elevation of the lower temperature sensor in

the protective well. Ensure that the datums are on the 1960-78 epoch. Second,

existing elevations of various support structure components, such as the pier deck,

instrument shelter floor, harbor bottom, etc., should be known. These elevations can

be scaled off, on the right hand side of the worksheet, with zero typically equal to

Mean Lower Low Water (or Low Water in the Great Lakes). The elevations can be

used to evaluate how the well/sounding tube can best be installed in compliance with

the requirements. 

The configuration side provides a step-by-step process to determine the length of

the well. Length A is the 1.5 m (5.0 ft) minimum clearance required for the cal

tube/blanking zone above the highest expected/observed water level elevation.

Length B is the additional height required for the top hat assembly to reach the pier

deck, instrument shelter floor, etc., above and beyond the highest

expected/observed water level elevation. Length C is the difference between the

highest and lowest expected/observed water levels with wave allowances applied.

Length D is the safety length added on at the well bottom, over the minimum depth

requirement for the orifice, if sufficient water depth is available. Length E is the sum

of B + C + D. Length F is the length of the brass antifouling tube, usually 0.9 m (3.0

ft), but possibly shorter if water depth limitations apply. Length G is the 0.1 m (0.3

ft) sounding tube end/well orifice offset. W is the total well length, defined as the top

of the top well flange to the bottom of the bottom well flange, and computed by

adding A + E + F + G. This can be rewritten as E + 2.5 m (8.3') if a standard brass

tube is used. 

Leng 1th T is the distance between the two thermistors. The upper sensor (t ) is

always placed at 0.6 m (2.0 ft) above the cal hole on the standard cal tube, or 0.3 m

2

(1.0 ft) for the 0.5 m (1.6 ft) cal tube. The elevation of the lower sensor (t ) is

determined as specified in Section 4.1.1-E, and length T computed accordingly.

Ven 1 2 t holes (v and v ) distances are also shown. If any of these set distances or

lengths must be modified, simply cross out the printed value and write in the actual.

The abbreviat 1 212 ions (v , v , t , t , j, c) can be used on the as-built sounding tube

elevation sketch. Spaces to note top hat and orifice assembly lengths are also

provided on the configuration.
JANUARY 1991 94 NGWLMS ILSP

WORKSHEET EXAMPLE 

Figure 6-3 is an example on how to compute a protective well length and the

elevation of the lower thermistor. All elevations used are on the existing staff.

Consider a station with the following parameters. The station has an existing staff

with a highest observed water level of 4.0 m (13.1 ft) and a lowest observed tide of

1.0 m (3.3 ft). The nearest wave station, referenced from Table 2, has an average

wave height of 0.8 m (3.0 ft). Because the station location is somewhat sheltered

from direct wave action, a decision is made to reduce it to 0.6 m (2.0 ft). The pier

deck is 7.6 m (25.0 ft) and the harbor bottom is -3.0 m (-10.0 ft). The problem is to

determine the length and elevation requirements for the NGWLMS protective well

and sounding tube. 

 

First, scale off the elevation side of the worksheet and draw lines marking the pier

deck, extreme observed tides plus wave allowances, and harbor bottom. The

highest observed water level plus wave allowance is 4.0 + 0.6 m (13.1 + 2.0 ft) = 4.6

m (15.1 ft). The lowest observed water level plus wave allowance is 1.0 - 0.6 m (3.3

- 2.0 ft) = 0.4 m (1.3 ft). Next, on the configuration side of the worksheet, compute

the value of C (high obs/est - low obs/est + [2 x wave allowance]): 4.0 - 1.0 m + [2

x 0.6 m] (13.1 - 3.3 ft + [2 x 2.0 ft]) = 4.2 m (13.8 ft). Enter this in the appropriate

space on the diagram. 

Next, look at the top end of the well. The minimum elevation of the top of the well

is length A above the high observed plus wave allowance, or 1.5 + 4.6 m (5.0 + 15.1

ft) = 6.1 m (20.0 ft). However, since the pier deck is higher than this elevation, 1.5

m (5.0 ft) is added to bring the well top up flush with the deck. This provides an

additional safety margin against extreme high water level values, allows easy access

to the top hat for maintenance, and avoids a potential temperature problem by

keeping the entire well length below the pier. This additional distance is called

length B and is shown on the configuration diagram. 

Now consider the bottom end of the well. The low observed datum plus wave

allowance is at 0.4 m (1.3 ft). At least 1.0 m (3.3 ft) more depth is needed to

accommodate the brass tube and the sounding tube above orifice requirement.

Adding on lengths F and G, 1.0 m (3.3 ft), on places the well bottom at -0.6 m (-2.0

ft). The harbor bottom is at -3.0 m (-10.0 ft) so plenty of water depth is available.

There is no need to consider shortening the brass antifouling tube. Therefore, since

at this point the well is 8.2 m (26.9 ft) in length, an additional 0.6 m (2.0 ft) is added

on as a safety factor against extreme low water levels. This puts the well bottom at

-1.2 m (-3.9 ft) which leaves plenty of clearance for the orifice assembly. The orifice

assembly is approximately 0.2 m (0.8 ft) in depth. The additional value is called D

and is shown on the configuration diagram. 

Length E is the sum of B + C + D = 1.5 + 4.2 + 0.6 m (5.0 + 13.8 + 2.0 ft) = 6.3 m

(20.8 ft). 

Total well length, W, is now computed by adding: A + E + F + G, or E + 2.5 m (8.3

ft), since the standard brass tube was used. W = 6.3 + 2.5 m (20.8 + 8.3 ft) = 8.8 m

(28.9 ft). 
JANUARY 1991 95 NGWLMS ILSP

The final step is to determine the elevation of the lower thermistor so that T can be

computed. The great diurnal range (Gt) at this site is 1.5 m (5.0 ft), and mean higher

high water (MHHW) is at 3.4 m (11.0 ft). Following the criteria detailed in Section

4.1.1-E, select the formula MHHW + [0.3 x Gt] = 3.4 m + [0.3 x 1.5 m] (11.0 ft + [0.3

x 5.0 ft]) = 3.8 m (12.5 ft). This is less than the high observed value of 4.0 m (13.1

ft), therefore position the lower thermistor at this elevation. The elevation of the

upper thermistor is 0.5 m (1.5 ft) below the top of the well which is 7.1 m (23.3 ft).

T, or the distance between the two, = 7.1 - 3.8 m (23.3 - 12.5 ft) = 3.3 m (10.8 ft). 

Now, using the scale set up earlier, draw the well on the elevation side of the

wo 1 2 1rksheet. Mark off on the well where the vent holes (v and v ), the thermistors (t

and 2 t ), the calibration hole (c), and the cpvc/brass joint (j) are, and note their

elevations. The above steps are performed to design the well. If any changes

become necessary during actual installation, the worksheet can also be used to

document the as-built.

JANUARY 1991 97 NGWLMS ILSP

6.3 SENSOR TEST WORKSHEET

The Sensor Test Worksheet (see Figure 6-4) is a form that provides space to

document the data recorded while testing each of the standard suite of sensors. It

shall be used whenever sensors are installed or replaced at a NGWLMS site. Each

section refers to a particular section which specifies the test data that shall be

recorded. Submit the worksheet with the NGWLMS Site Report.

6.4 9000 RTU LOG BOOK

 

Each 9000 RTU has a spiral notebook, sealed in a plastic bag, inside the bottom

compartment, that is used to log all activities performed on that unit. This provides

field personnel working on the unit with the maintenance history of the unit onsite.

The notebook, at installation, should contain the following: 

! Date, location, and names of the installation crew. 

! All serial numbers associated with the installation. 

! All sensor coefficients. 

! Sensor test results. 

! Site GOES transmission information. 

The logbook is to be kept in the lower compartment of the 9000 RTU.

6.5 SOFTWARE

 

Software is planned to automate all site documentation as well as track parts

inventory and maintenance activities for operational statistics on system reliability,

maintainability, and availability. The software will be issued with training and

instructions when available. 

JANUARY 1991 99 NGWLMS ILSP

REFERENCES

1). Hicks, Morris, Lippincott, and O'Hargan. User's Guide for the Installation of

Bench Marks and Leveling Requirements for Water Level Stations, October 1987.

Office of Oceanography and Marine Assessment, Rockville, MD 20852

2). Lightning Protection Institute. Lightning Protection Institute Standard of

Practice, Third Edition, 1987. Lightning Protection Institute. Harvard, IL 60033

3). Lockhart, Thomas J. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution

Measurement Systems: Volume IV - Meterological Measurements, August 1989. US

Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Research and Development,

Atmospheric Research and Exposure Assessment Laboratory. Research Triangle

Park, NC 27711

4). Ocean Systems Division. NGWLMS Field Unit: Acoustic Water Level Sensor

Calibration Procedure, November 1990. NOAA, National Ocean Service, Ocean

Systems Division. Rockville, MD 20852.

5). Office of Oceanography and Marine Assessment. Next Generation Water

Level Measurement System (NGWLMS) Integrated Logistics Support (ILS) Plan:

Part II, Field Unit, September 1988. Office of Oceanography and Marine

Assessment, Rockville, MD 20852

6). Office of Oceanography and Marine Assessment. TIDES-ABC Users Manual,

Version 3.14, December 2, 1985. Office of Oceanography and Marine Assessment,

Rockville, MD 20852

7). Shih, Hsing H. Water Level Measurement Errors Caused by Tide Gage

Stilling Wells: Part III, Development of Design Modifications to Reduce Errors

Induced by Current, Wave, and Marine Fouling Appendices, March 1, 1983. Office

of Oceanography and Marine Services, Rockville, MD 20852

8). SUTRON Corporation. NGWLMS User's and Operator's Manual, June 1988.

The SUTRON Corporation, Herndon, VA 22071

9). SUTRON Corporation. SUTRON 9000 RTU Operations and Maintenance

Manual, December 1988. The SUTRON Corporation, Herndon, VA 22071

10). SUTRON Corporation. SUTRON Model 8200-0 Data Recorder Operations

and Maintenance Manual, December 1988. The SUTRON Corporation, Herndon,

VA 22071

11). Young, Stephen A. Users' Guide For the Gas-Purged Pressure Recording

(Bubbler) Tide Gage, February 1977. Oceanographic Division, Rockville, MD 20852
JANUARY 1991 100 NGWLMS ILSP
JANUARY 1991 101 NGWLMS ILSP

APPENDIX A NGWLMS COMPONENTS LIST

A.1 MANUFACTURER PROVIDED COMPONENTS

A.1.1 9000 REMOTE TERMINAL UNIT (RTU) - The 9000 RTU consists of a Data

Instrumentation Sub-unit and an Interconnection Sub-unit housed in a NEMA

enclosure with two doors. 9000 RTU components are:

NEMA enclosure: 38.0 x 75.0 x 22.0 cm (15.0 x 29.5 x 8.75 inch)

! 7 kg (15 lbs) empty.

! Double compartment construction with one door for each compartment; top

compartment: 37.5 x 40.0 x 20.3 cm (14.75 x 15.75 x 8.0 inch), bottom

compartment: 37.5 x 28.6 x 20.3 cm (14.75 x 11.25 x 8.0 inch).

! Doors hinged with a .06 Ga. continuous bridge and sealed with neoprene

gasket using draw latches.

! .09 thick aluminum alloy 5052-H32 iridited per MIl-C-5541 Class 3.

! Outside surfaces and edges painted.

! Mounting tabs and feet on bottom; top mounting tabs have 1 cm (7/16 inch)

diameter holes, spaced 24.3 cm (9.6 inch) apart, bottom mounting tabs are

have 1 cm (7/16 inch) slots.

! One handle on top and one on side.

! I/O transition board mounted on wall separating compartments. Gasket and

pcb conformal coating provide environmental seal between compartments.

! Humidity indicator valve on door.

! AC power cord 3 m (10 foot).

 

Data Instrumentation Sub-unit: 30.5 x 34.4 x 15.2 cm (12.0 x 13.5 x 6.0 inch)

! 7 kg (15 lbs).

! Mounted in top compartment.

! .06 thick aluminum alloy 5052-H32 iridited per MIL-C-5541 Class 3.

! Outside surfaces and edges painted.

! Modular construction with 10 module capacity:

1. Power supply

2. UHF Satellite Radio

3. Communications controller

4. General Purpose I/O

5. Memory expansion

6. Central Processor

7. Telephone modem

8. Aquatrak®

9. Spare (empty)

10. Spare (empty) 

! Backplane mother board.

! Flat cables from 9000 modules mate with connectors on the upperside of

I/O transition board mounted on bottom of compartment. 
JANUARY 1991 102 NGWLMS ILSP

Interconnection Sub-unit

! 3.4 kg (7.5 lbs) excluding battery

! Mounted in lower compartment.

! AC power step-down board.

! Termination board with two flat cables to transition board.

! YUASA NP24-12 12 volt, 24 amp-hour battery: 14.0 x 21.6 x 14.0 cm

(5.5 x 8.4 x 5.5 inch), 10 kg (22 lbs).

! Cable grips for external sensors routed through wall.

A.1.2 WATER LEVEL SENSORS AND AUXILARY COMPONENTS - Two water

level sensors are included with each field unit. The primary sensor is an acoustic

transducer and the backup sensor is a pressure transducer with its own data logger.

Primary sensor components

! Aquatrak® acoustic transducer head.

! 15 m (50 ft) mating cable.

! Two YSI 44032 thermistors with 3 m (10 ft) cable.

! Two 15 m (50 ft) mating cables.

Backup sensor components

! Druck 10/D or IMO pressure transducer: 0-10 m (0-30 ft) range.

! One YSI 44032 thermistor.

! Junction box for atmospheric venting/cable merging.

! Sutron 8200 Data Recorder mounted in 30.5 x 30.5 x 30.5 cm (12 x 12 x 12

inch) NEMA enclosure with 3 m (10 ft) cable (to RTU).

! Two 15 m (50 ft) cables between sensor/junction box, one 15 m (50 foot)

unified cable between junction box/data recorder.

! Four 6-volt dry cell batteries.

 

A.1.3 SATELLITE ANTENNA

Sutron flat plate PVC GOES antenna: 28.0 x 28.0 x 20.3 cm (11.0 x 11.0 x 8.0 inch).

! 10 m (30 ft) cable.

! Mounting hardware.
JANUARY 1991 103 NGWLMS ILSP

A.2 AUXILARY COMPONENTS

A.2.1 FIELD UNIT

Support structure.

Instrument shelter.

Utilities (electric/solar panel and telephone).

Grounding system.

A.2.2 PROTECTIVE WELL

White, Schedule 80, 15 cm (6 inch) diameter, PVC pipe. 

Schedule 80, 15 cm (6 inch) diameter, PVC couplers, flanges, caps.

Acoustic Sensor Mounting Plate Assembly.

NO HUB coupler used for vent hole covers.

Brass double cone orifice with parallel plates.

Copper sheet insert.

Support brackets and associated hardware.

A.2.3 SOUNDING TUBE 

Aquatrak® sounding tube installation kit (BARTEX PN: S3000-28G).

5 - Center bails (BARTEX PN: 6-18002-1).

1 - Cal tube (to be matched with acoustic sensor)

1 - 1.5 m (5.0 ft) cpvc trim tube (no coupler)

4 - 1.5 m (5.0 ft) cpvc tubes (with couplers)

1 - 0.9 m (3.0 ft) brass antifouling tube with coupler

1 - cutting jig

1 - package tie wraps

Leveling fixture(s).

A.2.4 BACKUP PRESSURE SENSOR ASSEMBLY 

Mounting/backing board assembly and mounting hardware. 

A.2.5 ANTENNA MOUNT 

5 cm (2 inch) diameter, galvanized steel pipe with couplers and baseplate. 

A.2.6 CONDUIT 

PVC or galvanized steel pipe, sized as required.

Couplers, elbows, and outlet bodies.
JANUARY 1991 104 NGWLMS ILSP
JANUARY 1991 105 NGWLMS ILSP

APPENDIX B SITE PREPARATION TOOL AND

EQUIPMENT CHECKLIST 

This checklist attempts to list most items specifically required at NGWLMS sites as

a planning aid. Common tools, such as screwdrivers, wrenches, hammers, etc., are

not listed but will be needed. Hardware items are separated into general categories

for ease of use. A laptop, notebook, or portable 8086/8088 (or higher) IBM (or

compatible) PC with a floppy drive is also required to interact with the field unit.

STATION _________________________________________________________

 

TOOLS/SPECIAL EQUIPMENT Q U A N TITY N EE D E D (IF

APPLICABLE) 

Air tools w/Chicago Drill ____________________________

Air tools w/o Chicago Drill ____________________________

Chop saw ____________________________

Electric drill motor ____________________________

Coring equipment ____________________________

Extension cord ____________________________

1-1/2" Wrenches for 1" SS nuts ____________________________

1-1/8" Wrenches for 3/4" SS nuts ____________________________

Pipe wrenches ____________________________

Pipe strap wrench ____________________________

Pipe cutter ____________________________

Crosscut saw ____________________________

Hack saw ____________________________

Hole saw kit ____________________________

Piling scraper ____________________________

Plumb bob ____________________________

Carpenters level ____________________________

Inclinometer ____________________________

Compass ____________________________

Telephone ____________________________

Steel ruler (metric) ____________________________

Steel/cloth tapes ____________________________

Leveling fixtures ____________________________

Rope ____________________________

Boatswain chair w/rope ____________________________

Jacobs ladder ____________________________

Silicon sealant ____________________________

Camera w/film ____________________________

Flashlight ____________________________

Work gloves ____________________________
JANUARY 1991 106 NGWLMS ILSP

HARDWARE QUANTITY

 

Conduit 

 

1-1/4 inch PVC conduit _______________________(m/ft)

1-1/4 inch sweep L 90 elbow _________________________(#)

1-1/4 inch LB junction box _________________________(#)

1-1/4 inch couplers _________________________(#)

1-1/4 inch 45/90 elbow couplers _________________________(#)

Half omega clamps for conduit _________________________(#)

3/8 x 2-1/2 inch SS bolts _________________________(#)

3/8 inch double expansion shields _________________________(#)

3/8 & 1/2 inch bolts w/washers _________________________(#) 

Protective Well

6 inch, schedule 80, PVC pipe _______________________(m/ft)

6 inch PVC slip/slip coupler _________________________(#)

1/4 x 1 inch SS bolts (coupler) _________________________(#)

6 inch PVC slip flanges (3) _________________________

6 inch PVC threaded flange (1) _________________________

3/4 inch SS bolts/nuts/washers _________________________(#)

3/4 inch SS lock bolt _________________________

Lock _________________________

6 inch PVC end cap (1) _________________________

PVC primer/glue _________________________

6 inch NO HUB SS coupler (3) _________________________

Copper sheet insert _________________________

Double inverted cone _________________________

Parallel plates _________________________

 

Protective Well Brackets For Pile Connection

6 inch pipe brackets _________________________(#)

Pile brackets (_______ inch) _________________________(#)

1 inch SS all thread _________________________(#)

1 inch SS washers _________________________(#)

1 inch SS nuts _________________________(#)
JANUARY 1991 107 NGWLMS ILSP

HARDWARE QUANTITY

Protective Well Brackets For Pier Face Connection

6 inch pipe brackets _________________________(#)

1 inch SS all thread _________________________(#)

1 inch SS washers _________________________(#)

1 inch SS nuts _________________________(#)

4 inch L brackets _________________________(#)

Ship channel wall brackets _________________________(#)

1/2 x 3 inch SS bolts w/washers _________________________(#) 

1/2 x 7/8 inch expansion washers _________________________(#)

Lag screws - 3/8 x ______ inch _________________________(#)

Lag screws - 1/2 x ______ inch _________________________(#)

Lag screws - 5/8 x ______ inch _________________________(#)

Lag screw washers _________________________(#)

Sounding Tube

 

Aquatrak® sounding tube kit _________________________

Additional CPVC/coupler sections _________________________(#)

CPVC primer/glue _________________________

Center bails _________________________(#)

Tie wraps, short _________________________(#)

Backup Sensor Assembly

Fiberglass mounting board _______________________(m/ft)

Sensor mounting block _________________________

Mini parallel plates _________________________

Glide brackets _________________________(#)

Lifting eye _________________________

Lifting line or chain _______________________(m/ft)

or

Brass orifice _________________________

Neoprene tubing _______________________(m/ft)

Connectors _________________________(#)

Manifold _________________________

Nitrogen tank _________________________

Regulator _________________________
JANUARY 1991 108 NGWLMS ILSP

Antenna

 

Low loss cable _______________________(m/ft)

2 inch galvanized pipe _______________________(m/ft)

2 inch pipe baseplate _________________________

SS U-bolts (3-1/2 inch) w/nuts & washers _________________________(#)

SS U-bolts (5 inch) w/nuts & washers _________________________(#) 

Guy wire _______________________(m/ft)

SS wire cutter _________________________

Turnbuckles _________________________(#)

Thimble _________________________

Eye bolts w/nuts/washers _________________________(#)

Eye bolts, lag screw type _________________________(#)

Nico-press crimper w/sleeves _________________________

Tie wraps, long _________________________

Tie wraps, medium _________________________
JANUARY 1991 109 NGWLMS ILSP

APPENDIX C LIGHTNING PROTECTION

C.1 BACKGROUND 

Lightning protection is necessary at some NGWLMS sites in order to protect the

instrument shelter and its contents from the thermal, mechanical, and electrical

effects resulting from a direct or nearby lightning strike. Protection from lightning

and its effects can be provided on two levels. First, if a direct strike is probable, a

complete lightning protection system as described below should be installed.

Second, if only a nearby strike is probable, an adequate surge suppressor should

suffice. The NGWLMS 9000 RTU has a surge suppressor built into the system that

should be adequate for all but the most severe strikes. NGWLMS sites can be

evaluated for lightning strike potential using the following criteria, and have lightning

protection provided, if required.

C.2 SITE EVALUATION

There are two main factors to consider when evaluating the lightning strike potential

of a site. One is the geographic location of the site. Figure C-1 has a thunderstorm

day map that gives the number of days a year a location experiences lightning. It

can be seen that the southeast coastal states have the highest occurrence of storms

while the rest of the east coast and great lakes have a lower, but still significant,

frequency. The west coast sites, including Alaska and the Pacific island sites have

a very low frequency. 

Second, the configuration of the site shelter in relation to nearby, elevated,

structures is important. Nearby structures that are higher than the shelter will protect

the shelter from direct lightning strikes. This must be evaluated on a site by site

basis. A shelter is considered protected from a direct lightning strike if it is within a

one-to-two zone of protection (see Figure C-1) from a nearby structure that is 0 to

8 m (0 to 25 ft) tall, or a one-to-one zone if the structure is 8 to 15 m (25 to 50 ft) tall.

The structure can be a building, a tower, a light standard, etc. Lightning will strike

the structure and not the shelter. If the structure, particularly a metal pole or tower,

is within 3 m (10 ft) of the shelter the possibility of a sideflash exists. A sideflash

occurs when lightning strikes the structure, travels down the exterior, encounters

high resistance to finding a ground, and arcs over to another nearby structure (i.e.,

the shelter). In a situation such as this, the first ten feet of the protected zone can

no longer be considered protected, unless the nearby structure has a lightning

protection system on it. Should protection be required for the shelter in this case,

a lightning protection system should be installed either on the nearby structure, or

on the shelter.

Finally, other factors include cost considerations and data priority. Continuous

real-time data from some sites may be deemed critical enough to justify protection,

even if the risk of lightning induced damage is low.
JANUARY 1991 110 NGWLMS ILSP
JANUARY 1991 111 NGWLMS ILSP

C.3 LIGHTNING PROTECTION DESIGN SPECIFICATIONS

A lightning protection system is composed of air terminals, conductors, and grounds.

It is designed to intercept the lightning flash, and lead the current flow down along

the outside of the protected structure to a grounding system, where it is dissipated

harmlessly. An air terminal, which is a pointed solid or hollow tube, is placed at or

near the center of the shelter roof. The air terminal is connected by conductors

(cable) which provide a path to ground from the air terminal. A ground is provided

by rods or plates placed in the earth or underwater. Lightning protection system

specifications are provided below and have been adapted from the Lightning

Protection Institue Standard of Practice: LPI-175 for application to a typical NOS

NGWLMS fiberglass instrument shelter. 

 1. Air terminals shall be 1/2 inch diameter copper rod or tube with a minimum

wall thickness of 1/32 inch. Fittings and attachments shall be copper and of bolted

pressure type construction. Conductors shall be cable, made up of multiple strands

of 17 gauge copper wire, weighing 187.5 pounds/1000 feet. Ground rods shall be

5/8 inch diameter copper rod at least 3 m (10 ft) long, or 20 gauge copper plate at

least 0.2 m (2.0 ft ) in area. 2 2

 2. The air terminal shall protrude a minimum of 0.3 m (0.8 ft) above adjacent

projections and shall be centered on the roof.

 3. Two paths to ground shall be provided by conductors for the air terminal.

Branch conductors shall be connected to all metal objects (antennas, sensor masts,

etc.) within 2 m (6 ft) of any main conductor and to any metal service conduit

entering the shelter. Plastic conduit does not require a connection.

 4. The two ground connections shall be spaced as far apart, and as far from the

shelter, as possible. Rods shall be used for an earth ground connection and plates

for an underwater ground connection. An earth connection is preferred over an

underwater connection. Rods should be driven into the earth at least 3 m (10 ft)

deep. Permanently moist clayey soil is the most desirable earth type for a ground.

Dry sandy soils are the worst. Plates shall be secured to a support structure below

the lowest expected water level.
JANUARY 1991 112 NGWLMS ILSP
JANUARY 1991 113 NGWLMS ILSP

APPENDIX D COEFFICIENT "2A": PRIMARY

BENCH MARK (PBM) ABOVE

SITE DATUM OF TABULATION

Station Station PBM Above Datum

Number Name PBM Stamping Meters (Feet)

841 0140 Eastport, ME NO 3 1918 15.685 (51.46)

841 1250 Cutler, ME 1250 K 1978 22.232 (72.94)

841 3320 Bar Harbor, ME No Stamping (6 1911) 6.383 (20.94)

841 5490 Rockland, ME 5490 K 1976 10.058 (33.00)

841 8150 Portland, ME ELEV 14.501 FT TIDAL 31 8.406 (27.58)

844 3970 Boston, MA K 12 MASS G.S. 1936 14.292 (22.50)

844 7930 Woods Hole, MA 11 1932 3.447 (11.31) 

844 9130 Nantucket, MA NO 22 1934 3.685 (12.09)

845 2660 Newport, RI 6 (1943) 2.813 ( 9.23)

845 4000 Providence, RI NO 6 RESET 1930 4.493 (14.74)

846 1490 New London, CT 13 1938 4.176 (13.70)

846 7150 Bridgeport, CT NO 15 1964 4.624 (15.17)

851 0560 Montauk, NY 0560 J 1977 3.618 (11.87)

851 4560 Port Jefferson, NY 4560 B 1981 5.264 (17.27)

851 6990 Willets Point, NY NO 3 1944 5.115 (16.78)

851 8750 NYC (Battery), NY NO 5 1973 4.984 (16.35)

851 9483 Bergen Point, NY 9483 A 1981 5.553 (18.22)

853 1680 Sandy Hook, NJ 1680 A 1979 3.578 (11.74)

853 1991 Long Branch, NJ TIDAL NO 1 1948 10.546 (34.60)

853 4770 Ventnor City, NJ 4770 A 1985 9.376 (30.76)

853 6110 Cape May, NJ NO 1 1965 4.892 (16.05)

853 9993 Trenton, NJ TERMINAL 5.169 (16.96)

854 5530 Philadelphia, PA 5530 A 1989 4.688 (15.38)

855 1910 Reedy Point, DE 1910 B 1979 3.685 (12.09)

855 7380 Lewes, DE NO 20 1975 3.990 (13.09)

857 0280 Ocean City, MD F 104 1962 3.719 (12.20)

857 1892 Cambridge, MD 1892 D 1980 3.344 (10.97)

857 3364 Tolchester, MD KNOB 1950 9.470 (31.07)

857 3903 Town Point, MD NO 5 1972 3.097 (10.16)

857 4070 Havre de Grace, MD NO 5 1938 9.306 (30.53)

857 4680 Baltimore, MD 25 1919 3.057 (10.03)

857 5512 Annapolis, MD 7 1941 2.877 ( 9.44)

857 7330 Solomons Island, MD 7330 A 1978 5.172 (16.97)

859 4900 Washington, DC TIDAL NO 1 1951 4.115 (13.50)
JANUARY 1991 114 NGWLMS ILSP

Station Station PBM Above Datum

Number Name PBM Stamping Meters (Feet)

863 1044 Wachapreague, VA 1044 B 1978 4.139 (13.58)

863 2200 Kiptopeke, VA L-418 4.130 (13.55)

863 5150 Colonial Beach, VA NO 8 1959 2.926 ( 9.60)

863 5750 Lewisetta, VA R 462 1971 2.874 ( 9.43)

863 6580 Windmill Point, VA NO 2 1970 2.161 ( 7.09)

863 7624 Gloucester Point, VA 7624 F 1979 3.917 (12.85)

863 8610 Hampton Roads, VA 6 1927 5.197 (17.05)

863 8660 Portsmouth, VA No Stamping (5-F9 1913) 3.984 (13.07)

863 8863 Ches. Bay Bridge, VA NO 2 1975 15.914 (52.21)

865 1370 Duck (Outside) Pier, NC 865 1370 B 1977 10.061 (33.01)

865 4400 Cape Hatteras, NC NO 1 1973 3.408 (11.18)

865 6483 Duke Marine Lab, NC NO 12 1964 3.417 (11.21)

865 8120 Wilmington, NC 8120 D 1976 2.454 ( 8.05)

866 1070 Springmaid Pier, SC 1070 B 1976 12.817 (42.05)

866 1139 Bucksport, SC NO 7 1975 5.331 (17.49)

866 2746 Winyah Bay, SC W.B. NO. 1 1975 2.938 ( 9.64)

866 2799 South Santee River, SC V 124 1976 7.952 (26.09)

866 4022 General Dynamics, SC 4022 A 1976 3.319 (10.89)

866 5530 Charleston, SC ELEV NO 13 8.264 FT 1928 4.020 (13.19)

867 0870 Fort Pulaski, GA 5 4.877 (16.00)

872 0030 Fernandina, FL 34 1923 4.770 (15.65)

872 0220 Mayport, FL BM EDM 15 1942 MSL 3.206 (10.52)

872 1120 Daytona Beach, FL NO 1 1966 5.907 (19.38)

872 1456 Titusville, FL Z 131 3.722 (12.21)

872 2621 Palm Beach, FL A 2621 1976 2.926 ( 9.60)

872 2670 Lake Worth, FL Q 317 1970 14.484 (47.52)

872 3080 Haulover Pier, FL 3080 A 1982 2.512 ( 8.24)

872 3170 Miami Beach, FL BM NO 6 USE 2.890 ( 9.48)

872 3962 Key Colony Beach, FL 3962 A 1976 2.758 ( 9.05)

872 3970 Vaca Key, FL NO 1 1975 2.073 ( 6.80)

872 4580 Key West, FL 29 1923 8.140 3.981 (13.06)

872 5110 Naples, FL NO 7 1974 4.225 (13.86)

872 5520 Fort Myers, FL 5520 C 1978 2.755 ( 9.04)

872 6520 St. Petersburg, FL NO 16 1962 2.789 ( 9.15)

872 6724 Clearwater Beach, FL LP 10 RM 1 2.234 ( 7.33)

872 7520 Cedar Key, FL 8 1910 2.347 ( 7.70)

872 8229 Shell Point, FL NO 1 1973 2.350 ( 7.71)

872 8360 Turkey Point, FL NO 1 1969 2.521 ( 8.27)

872 8690 Apalachicola, FL NO 1 1933 14.124 5.669 (18.60)

872 9108 Panama City, FL L 9108 1977 3.965 (13.01)

872 9210 Dan Russell Pier, FL 9210 C 1989 12.820 (42.06)

872 9678 Navarre Beach, FL 9678 H 1977 11.826 (38.80)

872 9840 Pensacola, FL 8 1923 6.498 (21.32)

873 5180 Dauphin Island, AL NO 1 1960 6.288 (20.63)

874 7437 Bay Waveland, MS 7437 A 1978 1.871 ( 6.14)
JANUARY 1991 115 NGWLMS ILSP

Station Station PBM Above Datum

Number Name PBM Stamping Meters (Feet) 

876 0551 South Pass, LA N 280 1971 1.100 ( 3.61)

876 1724 Grand Isle, LA 10 2.810 ( 9.22)

876 1927 USCG New Canal Sta, LA 1927 A 1982 2.896 ( 9.50)

876 2928 Cocodrie, LA 2928 A 1986 1.786 ( 5.86) 

877 0570 Sabine Pass North, TX 0570 A 1985 3.264 (10.71)

877 1450 Galveston, Pier 21, TX ELEV 7.151 U. S. ENG. 2.856 ( 9.37)

877 1510 Galveston, Pleas. Pier, TX NO 43 1957 8.605 (28.23)

877 2440 Freeport, TX 2440 A 1980 4.874 (15.99)

877 4770 Rockport, TX NO 3 1934 3.078 (10.10)

877 5870 Corpus Christi, TX 5870 A 1983 9.098 (29.85)

877 8490 Port Mansfield, TX 1 (1964) 2.396 ( 7.86)

877 9751 Padre Island, TX 2 1934 2.195 ( 7.20)

877 9770 Port Isabel, TX 2 1944 4.657 (15.28)

941 0170 San Diego, CA 12 1926 6.325 (20.75)

941 0230 La Jolla, CA 7 1958 12.299 (40.35)

941 0580 Newport Beach, CA 1 NP 1955 4.599 (15.09)

941 0660 Los Angeles, CA 8-14 FT ABOVE MLLW 5.361 (17.59)

941 0840 Santa Monica, CA 4 1940 9.339 (30.64)

941 1340 Santa Barbara, CA 1 1930 5.934 (19.47)

941 2110 Port San Luis, CA 6 1936 5.691 (18.67)

941 3450 Monterey Harbor, CA NO 2 1924 5.669 (18.60) 

941 4290 San Francisco, CA 180 1936 5.794 (19.01)

941 4750 Alameda, CA NO 8 1939 4.795 (15.73)

941 5020 Point Reyes, CA BM B243 1949 4.977 (16.33)

941 5144 Port Chicago, CA 5144 H 1976 4.209 (13.81)

941 6841 Arena Cove, CA 6 1945 11.604 (38.07)

941 8767 North Spit (Humboldt), CA NO 9 1937 9.205 (30.20)

941 9750 Crescent City, CA TIDAL 20 1959 RESET 1960 5.227 (17.15)

943 1647 Port Orford, OR 6 1937 12.256 (40.21)

943 2780 Charleston, OR 2780 A 1981 5.895 (19.34)

943 5380 South Beach, OR A 590 1965 6.419 (21.06)

943 9040 Astoria, OR TIDAL 11 1959 5.934 (19.47)

944 0910 Toke Point, WA 0910 H 6.669 (21.88)

944 3090 Neah Bay, WA NO 19 1962 6.507 (21.35)

944 4090 Port Angeles, WA L 467 1974 14.475 (47.49)

944 4900 Port Townsend, WA NO 9 1952 4.548 (14.92)

944 7130 Seattle, WA NO 13 1922 8.083 (26.52)

944 9424 Cherry Point, WA TIDAL 1 1971 11.226 (36.83)

944 9880 Friday Harbor, WA NO 10 1964 4.892 (16.05)

945 0460 Ketchikan, AK NO 24 1921 8.946 (29.35)

945 1600 Sitka, AK TIDAL 26 1974 13.920 (45.67)

945 2210 Juneau, AK No Stamping (8) 13.036 (42.77)

945 2400 Skagway, AK NO 11 1969 11.646 (38.21)

945 3220 Yakutat Bay, AK 3220 Z 1986 8.745 (28.69)

945 4050 Cordova, AK 4050 M 1977 9.406 (30.86)

945 4240 Valdez, AK NO 21 1966 8.327 (27.32)
JANUARY 1991 116 NGWLMS ILSP

Station Station PBM Above Datum

Number Name PBM Stamping Meters (Feet)

945 5090 Seward, AK NO 22 1966 9.458 (31.03)

945 5500 Seldovia, AK BM 19 1967 11.272 (36.98)

945 5760 Nikishka, AK NIKISKI 1 12.518 (41.07)

945 5920 Anchorage, AK NO 15 RESET 1966 13.231 (43.41)

945 7292 Kodiak (Womens Bay), AK 7292 B 1984 14.124 (46.34)

945 9450 Sand Point, AK 5 1943 14.886 (48.84)

946 1380 Adak, AK NO 18 1957 6.700 (21.98)

946 2620 Unalaska, AK NO 7 1956 3.597 (11.80)

946 3502 Port Moller, AK 3502 B 15.420 (50.59)

949 7645 Prudhoe Bay STP, Ak Cell 4 B 16.389 (53.77)

161 1347 Port Allen, HI 1347 A 1988 4.432 (14.54)

161 1400 Nawiliwili, HI NO 5 1954 2.256 ( 7.40)

161 2340 Honolulu, HI BM ELEV 8.06 FEET 3.734 (12.25)

161 2480 Mokuoloe, HI NO 1 1957 1.969 ( 6.46)

161 5680 Kahului, HI 2 1929 3.456 (11.34)

161 7433 Kawaihae, HI BM 6 1968 3.121 (10.24)

161 7760 Hilo, HI NO 4 1951 4.663 (15.30)

161 9000 Johnston, Island NO 13 1955 2.850 ( 9.35)

161 9910 Sand Island, Midway 21 1959 3.243 (10.64)

163 0000 Apra Harbor, Guam NO 4 1949 2.996 ( 9.83)

173 2417 Papeete, Tahiti NU 2 1969 13.826 (45.36) 

177 0000 Pago Pago, Am. Samoa 0000 M 1983 4.023 (13.20)

182 0000 Kwajalein NO 8 1951 2.853 ( 9.36)

184 0000 Truk Atoll B 1948 2.454 ( 8.05)

189 0000 Wake Island NO 12 1961 4.353 (14.28)

191 0000 Suva, Fiji 1 1989 13.664 (44.83)

212 2060 Darwin, Australia S79/509/66A 15.228 (49.96)

243 1000 Diego Garcia 1000 D 1990 14.268 (46.81)

269 5535 St. Georges, Bermuda 5535 H 1978 2.444 ( 8.02)

269 5540 Esso Pier, Bermuda 5540 A 1979 14.807 (48.58)

971 0441 Settlement Pt, Bahamas 0441 A 1985 13.725 (45.03)

975 1224 West Indies Lab, VI NO 1 1975 2.463 ( 8.08)

975 1401 Limetree Bay, VI 975-1401 M 1983 13.612 (44.66)

975 1639 Charlotte Amalie, VI 1639 F 1983 3.267 (10.72)

975 5371 San Juan, PR 5371 A 1977 2.600 ( 8.53)

975 9110 Magueyes Island, PR TIDAL BM NO 1 1955 4.755 (15.60)
JANUARY 1991 117 NGWLMS ILSP

APPENDIX E NGWLMS ANCILLARY SENSOR

MANUFACTURER INFORMATION

E.1 WIND SENSOR

E.1.1 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

E.1.2 MAIN HOUSING TRANSDUCER ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM

E.1.3 CABLE WIRING DIAGRAM

E.1.4 GENERAL ASSEMBLY DIAGRAM 

E.1.5 POTENTIOMETER DIAGRAM 

E.1.6 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST

E.2 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE 

E.2.1 SPECIFICATION SHEET 

E.2.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

E.3 AIR TEMPERATURE

E.3.1 THERMISTOR/CABLE DIAGRAM

E.3.2 THERMISTOR SPECIFICATION SHEET

E.3.3 GILL MULTI-PLATE RADIATION SHIELD

E.4 RESERVED FOR SOLAR RADIATION

E.5 RESERVED FOR DEW POINT

E.6 RESERVED FOR RAINFALL

E.7 RESERVED FOR WATER CURRENT

E.8 WATER CONDUCTIVITY

E.8.1 SPECIFICATION SHEET

E.8.2 CARE AND CLEANING OF CONDUCTIVITY CELLS

E.8.3 DISASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS

E.8.4 HOOKUP INSTRUCTIONS

E.9 WATER TEMPERATURE

E.9.1 THERMISTOR/CABLE DIAGRAM

E.9.2 THERMISTOR SPECIFICATION SHEET

E.10 WATER PRESSURE

E.10.1 SPECIFICATION SHEETS
JANUARY 1991 118 NGWLMS ILSP

E.11 RESERVED FOR ANALOG, FREQUENCY DEVICES

E.12 METEROLOGICAL TOWERS

E.12.1 BRACKETED STEEL TOWER

E.12.1.1 SPECIFICATION SHEET

E.12.1.2 ASSEMBLY/INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS

E.12.1.3 TOWER SECTION DIAGRAM

E.12.1.4 BASEPLATE DIAGRAM

E.12.1.5 PARTS LIST

E.12.1.6 WIND LOAD DIAGRAMS

E.12.2 FIBERGLASS POLE

E.12.2.1 SPECIFICATION SHEETS

E.12.2.2 TECHNICAL DATA
JANUARY 1991 119 NGWLMS ILSP

E.1 WIND SENSOR
JANUARY 1991 120 NGWLMS ILSP
VDU~
INSTRUCTIONS

MODEL 05103

WIND MONITOR

YOUNG

0 WIND MONITOR

SPECIFICATION SUMMARY

INT~N

INITIAL CHECK OUT

INSTALLATION

CALIBRATION

MAINTENANCE

SECTIONVEW

PROPELlER CALIBRATION CURVES

CABLE AND WIRING DIAGRAM

ASSEMBl. Y DIAGRAM

REPLACeMENt PARTS AND

ACCESSORES

0

0

0

0

0

0

SENSOR INTERFACE CARD

LINE DRIVER

WS/WD INDICATOR

RECORDER-TRANSLATOR

R. M. YOUNG COMPANY

2801 Aero-Park D'ive. Traverse .city. MI 49684. U. S. A.

PHN 616-946-3980 FAX 616-94604772 TWX 810.291.3& ~~

INSTALLATION inside the main housing. Details for making this adjustment appear

in the MAINT.fNANCe potentiometer replacement outline, step 7.

It is imponant to note that while full scale azimuth on signa' conditioning electronics may be 360", full scale azimuth signal from the

instrument is:JSSO. The signal ~nditioning electronics must be

adjusted accordingly. Forexampje, in acircuitwhere Oto 1.000 VOC

represents 0" to 'Br, the output must be adjusted for O.~ \/DC

when the instrument it at 3~S-. (3558/:B)" X 1.~ volts . 0.-

volts)

Proper placement of the instrument is very important. Eddies from

trees, buildings. or other structures can greatly influence wind speed

and wind direction observations. To get meaningful data for most

applications locate the instrument well above or upwind from Ob.

structions. As a general rule; the air flow around a structure is

disturbed to twice the height of th~ $tryr:ture upwind. 'Ix time'thl

height downwind. and up to twice the height of the structure above

ground. For some applications it may not be practical or necessary

to meet these requirements. Wind speed ~alibration is determined by propeUer pitch and the

output characteristics of the transducer. Calibration formulas showing propeller rpm and frequency output VI. wind speed are included

in this manual. These formulas are accurate tQ within 2 percent. For

greater accuracy, the propeller must be individually calibrated in

comparison with. wind speed standard. ('..on~ th~ t~ or your

supplier to schedule a wind tunnel calibration in our facility.

Initial installation is most easily done with two people during the vane

alignment step; one to adjust the instrument position and the other

to observe the indicating device. After initial installation, the instru.

ment can be r~mo~(1 @nd rf!tumed to It' mounting without ~.

aligning the vane since the orientation ring preserves the wind

direction reference. Install the Wind Monitor following these steps:

To calibrate wind system electronics using a signal from the instrument. temporarily remove the propeller and connect a synchronous

motor to the propeller shaft. Apply the appropriate calibration

formula to the calibrating motor rpm and adjust the electronics for

the proper value. For examp'-'. with the propeller shaft tuming at

3600 rpm adjust an indICator to display 39.5 mila per hOur. {3600

rpm X 0.01096 mptlirpm . 39.5 mphl

Details on checl<ing bearing torque, which affects wind speed and

direction threshold. ap~ar in the following section.

MAINTENANCE

-Given proper care, the Wind Monitor should provide ye8l80f service.

Constructed entirely of non-corrosive materials and using compo.

nents which are conservatively rated, the instrument requires little

mainten~. The only components likely to need replacement due

to norm.I_~r ~r. ttI. preC!I!on bill bta,irtQ* and the wind di~laft

potentiometer. Only a qualified instrument ted\niCian ahoutd perform the replacement. If service facilities are not available, retum the

instrument to the company. Refer to the drawings to become

familiar with part names and locations. The asterisk. whidl appe81S

in the following outlines isa reminder that maximum torque on all 88t

screws is 80 01"".

POTENTIOMETER ~PlACEMENT:

The potentiometer has a life expectancy of fifty million revolution&.

As it becomes worn, the element may begin to produce noisy signals

or become non.Jlnear. Y-'\en signal noise or non-linearity becomeS

unacceptable replace the potentiometer as follows: Reterto ex.

ploded vi- drawing.

,. MOUNT WIND MONITOR

a) Place orientation ring on mounting post. Do Not tighten band

clamp yet.

b) Place Wind Monitor on mounting post. Do Not tighten band

clamp yet.

2. CONNECT SENSOR CABlE

a) Slide junction box COY8f up.

b) Connect sensor cable to terminals. See wiring diagram.

c) Route cable thru strain relief opening at bottom of junction

box. Secure cable by tightening packing nut.

d) Slide junction box cover down.

3. ALIGN VANE

a) Connect instrument to an indicator.

b) Choose a known wind direction reference point on the

horizon.

c) Sighting down instrument centerline, point nose cone at

reference point on horizon.

d) Y-'lile holding vane in position, ~owly tum bale until

indicator shows proper value.

e) Tighten mounting post band clamp.

f) Engage orientation ring indexing pin in notch at instrument

bale.

g) Tighten orientation ring band clamp.

CALIBRATION

The Wind Monitor is fully calibrated before shipment and should

require no adjustments. Recalibration may be necessary after some

maintenance operations. Periodic ~alibration checks are desireable

and may be necessary where the instrument is used in programs

which require auditing of sensor performance.

A very accurate wind direction calibration requires either a Model

17221 Vane Angle Fixture or a Model 18101 Bench Test Stand with

Protractor, WlthoutJhese devices the following method ean yield

vane caliDration accuracies of : S- or better if carefully done. Begin

by connecting the instrument to a signal condItioning circuit which

has some method of indicating azimuth value. This may bea display

which shows azimuth values in angular degrees or simply a voltmeter monitoring the output. Hold or mount the instrument so its center

of rotation is over the center of a paper w"iCPI has 30" or 45°

crossmarkings. Orient the base so the junction box faces due south.

Visually align the vane with the CfO$smarkings and observe tIle

indicator output. If the vane position and indicator 00 not agree

within 5°, it may be necessary to adjust the potentiometer coupling

1. REMOVE MAIN HOUSING

a) Unscrew nose Cone from main housing. Do not lose o-ring

seal.

b) Gently push main housing latch.

c) While pushing latCh. lift main housing up and remove it from

vertical shaft bearing rotor.

2. UNSOLDER TRANSDUCER ~

a) Slide junction box cover up. exposing circuit board.

b) Remove 8efeWS holding circuit board.

c) Unsolder three potentiome~r wires (white, gr..n, black) 8M

two wind speed coil wires (red. black) from top of board.

3. REMOVE POTENT~ETeR

a) Loosen set screw on potentiometer coupling and remove it

from potentiOmeter adjust thumbwheel.

b) Loosen set screw on potentiometer adjust thumbwheel and

remove it from po~ntlometer shaft extension.

co

...

00

cD

a. ~

'"

~

("If

...00

...

CQ\

'-

\

~

\.

w

r')00N

r-.

~

I"')aa0

co"

"

. ,

\,

..-; '"

~ , ~ ,

J \, "0 . "

~ '\

~ ~ '.,

. \

r,~\

~-~~

\~

\!;\'

\:;.

~ N

00

«) .

\.

'"

'\

V)

I-Z

'5

Q. Z0F<~m~<

()

\.\\\

\.

\.i

.i\ 0') 

-

,.: ~

.

,e.

G!

... \\~

.-

gCD

,.,

~E

oK

on

,.; G

\.\

.

..2- Nci -

,- 

.-"'

Eft .

- ~ .E

2 :2

a.- a.-

Q:;E Q:;E

02 o~

0- 0-

co- 0-

~ f"1

\T~

\\J;

~E

GI; N

,.,

N00

..,. N

\ \.:

i\

,~~

\'

'\'

'-' ~

00N

...

\

0

0

.0,0

(7) 00-0

«)

0~

00.

I()VJ0Z~ 0~~0N

S?;

-00

'-

:J0

or. a::

... 0

Q) U)

0. Z

L..J

VI U)

...

~ 2:

Q) 0

E a:: ..2 L.-

~ >-

.:

vi ~ -' .t; 0

c "

~ z

. -

'0 (J

C -<

0 ~

u

Q) L..J

VI :2

... -<

., Z

0.

>-

-' z

- : -<a..

. 2:

... 0

6 (J

.Co X

... I-

~ ~

It ~

., L.J

:= ...I E ...I L.J

-0 @>

C 0:

0 a.. u

., ...I

VI ...I

... -<

Q> I0. U) Z M -

~ .

-

Q> E

r,~

~U

Ink

0.

.2








WIND MONITOR

MODEL 05103

REPLACEMENT PARTS

PART NO. PART NAM! PRICE IUS)

. . $ 741XJ

.. 17.00

.. 19.00

.. 3..,

.. 9.00

.. 1..3)

.. 178.00

.. 14.00

.. 88.00

.. 13.00

.. 8.~

.. 7..,

.. 42.00

.. 54.00

.. 2.40

.. 48.00

.. 13.00

.. &.ZJ

.. 19.00

.. 1.m

.. 1,m

.. 72.00

.. 2SJXJ

.. ~.OO

.. a.m

05121D

05124VG

051aaC

05127

051288

05129

051~

05131D

051338

05135C

05138A

051»

OS145C

0515QC

05158

051S]C

05161A

OS163PG

051648 .

05155A

051878

0517OC

05178

08234

051~

MOUNTINGPOSTASSY : ;..

POTENTIOMETER . ,~ 1/4% UN CONn PLASTIC :.

POTENTIOMETEA SHAFT iXTENSlON (WITH o.NG) .

.

POTENTIOMETER MOUNTING AND COIL ASSY . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . .1 . .. . . . . ~ . . .

6 POLE MAGNET & SHAFT ca.LAR ..' ' '..'.' ..'.'

FRONT BEARING CAP '.. ...

~ MJT (FLANGED) ..'...' '.." ~ ~

CAUBRATJON ACCESSORIES

M4.~

,~

~

54.00

542.~

27..00

17221

18112

18310

18330

1~1

27232

ANEMOMETER BEARING TOOOUE DISC - PfK)PELL.ER SHAFT

SELECTABLE SPEED ANEMOMETER Df"\'E ,

CALIBRATING UNIT - 36(X) RPM. 115 V ,--

BECAUSE OF CONTINUAlLY CHANGI~ COSTS PRICES ON THIS PARTS lIST ~

SUBJECT TO CHAt.K;E. IF EXACT PRICI~ IS REQUIRED PLEASEOOONTICT US.

R. M. YOUNG COMPANY

2801 AERO-PARK DR/\'E. TRA\E:RSE.CJTY. MI4~. U.S.A.

PUN ~,~~ TWX 810.~1~ FAX NO. 616-94&04772 ~1~

JANUARY 1991 137 NGWLMS ILSP

E.2 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE 
JANUARY 1991 138 NGWLMS ILSP






JANUARY 1991 145 NGWLMS ILSP

E.3 AIR TEMPERATURE
JANUARY 1991 146 NGWLMS ILSP





JANUARY 1991 153 NGWLMS ILSP

E.8 WATER CONDUCTIVITY
JANUARY 1991 154 NGWLMS ILSP
3.04 in -I

(7.7 a11) I

VIEW A A

1.9 in

(4.8 cm)

~

I

- --- ., - ,

' .-: .

i ,r 1 ",; i

; 0 'i d

9.9in

(24.6 cm)

( XSG - 3BCL - HP)

PIN - SIGNAL

(1) COMMON

(2) SIGNAL

(3) + POWER

I

I

1.9 in

T1.7 in

l

DESCRIPTION

The SBE 4 conductivity sensor is modular and self-contained.

permitting easy installation, service, and calibration. The

sensor has a frequency output of approximately 3 to 12 kHz

corresponding to conductivity from 0 to 7 Siemens/meter

[S/m] (optionally 0 to 0.6 S/m), covering the full range of

fresh water and oceanic applications. The cell design confines

electric fields to the inside of the cell, making measurements

and instrument calibration independent of the calibration bath

size or proximity to protective cages or other objects: a

distinct advantage over inductively coupled or "open" external

field cells. 3,400 meter depth capability is standard. Optional

housings provide 6,800 or 10,500 meter capability. The

power/signal cable and mounting hardware for Sea-Bird CTDs

are available separately.

APPLICATION

The SBE 4 is an ideal sensor for vertical profiling with lowered

systems or horizontal profiling with towed systems. Its small

size is well suited for moorings, portable CTD systems.

underwater vehicles or through-the-ice work. It has a proven

record of reliability and accuracy with 17 years of field use

and calibrations by the Northwest Regional Calibration Center

(an independent U.S. government contractor).

The SBE 4 is a primary sensor for Sea-Bird's SBE 9 CTD

Underwater Unit and SSE 25 Sealogger CTD and is also easily

adapted to custom applications. The SBE 4's low noise

characteristics allow the use of hybrid frequency measuring

techniques to obtain rapid sampling with very high resolution.

A published article [1] describes how a resolution of 1 x 10'S

S/m may be obtained at a 6 Hz sampling rate.

OPERATION

The flow-through sensing element is a glass tube (cell) with

3 internal platinum electrodes. The resistance measured

between the center electrode and end electrode pair is

determined by the cell geometry and the specific

conductance (conductivity) of the fluid within the cell. The

cell resistance controls the output frequency of a patented

Wien Bridge circuit [2]. An internally-fixed conductivity offset

enables measurements down to 0 conductivity.

Power required: 10 - 20 VOG, 10 ma

Signal output: 0.7 V (rms) sine wave

Materials (3400/6800 m): Anodized aluminum

(6061- T6 or 7075- T6)

Materials (10.50(\ m): Titanium (6AI4V)

Weight (Aluminulll): 0.7 kg (1.6 Ibs) in air

0.34 ,.~ (.75 Ibs) in water

Weight (Titanium): 1.1 kg (2.4 Ibs) in air

0.7 kg (1.5 Ibs) in water

SPECIFICATIONS1 Accuracy/Stability: t 0.ooo3..S/m/month (typical) 3

Measurement Range: 0.0 to 7 Siemens/meter (S/m) ~ 0.001 ",/m/month (guaranteed)

(0.0 to 70 mmho/cm) TIme Response4 (pumped): 0.085 sec. (0.5 m/s drop)

R.'OIUUO,,:2 0.00004 81m tfJ 24 sample. per .econd 0.070 MO, (1,0 mIl drop)

(no pump): 0,170 18O, (2.0 mIl tow)

1 Typical specifications, referenced to NBS-traceable calibration, and applying over tne entire oceanographic range.

l Achieved with Sea-Bird's seE 9 OTO. In custom applications, resolutlol'l will depend on the fre~uel'ley measuring teehni~ue used.

3 Not applicable in areas of high biofouling activity, highly contaminated waters or it procedures in Application Bulletin 20 are not followed.

4 Time to reach 03% of final value following a step change in conductivity.

SBE SEA - BIRD ELECTRONICS, INC.

\~~"~ 1808 136th Place NE. Bellevue. W A. 98005 USA

Telephone (206) 643-9866

Telex 292915 SBEI UR Fax (206) 643-9954
The approximate relationship between output frequency and conductivity is given by:

f = H (0 + d)O.s [Hz].

where f is output frequency. H is a constant determined by the cell geometry and circuit components (H =4400), 0 is

conductivity in [8jm] and d is the conductivity offset (d =0.4).

The sensitivity of the circuit is approximately: afjao = 0.5 Hj(o + d)O.S [Hz per 8jm] and varies from 2700 [Hz per

8jm] at 0 8jm to 850 [Hz per 8jm] at 6 8jm.

CALIBRATION

All instruments are calibrated from approximately 1.5 to 6 8jm by the Northwest Regional Calibration Center (NRCC).

operating under contract to NOAA. Using a least squares fitting technique, the following equation is fitted to the NRCC

data and the instrument's zero conductivity frequency:

af" + bF + c + dt

Conductivity [81m] =

10 [1 - (9.57X10-8) p]

where f is the instrument frequency [kHz], t is temperature [OC], p is pressure [decibars] and a, b, c, d, & mare

coefficients listed on the calibration certificate. Residuals are typically less than 0.0003 81m. A published article [3]

describes user experience and also discusses instrument noise level, cell maintenance and calibration methods. Users

have since improved performance by using anti-foulant to protect the cell from biological growth. After a 5 month mooring

at depths of 80 to 290 meters, four 8BE4s with anti-foulant protection showed drifts of <0.0015 81m over a year's interval

between calibrations. An optional anti-foulant device. specifically developed for moorings, consists of anti-foulant

impregnated cylinderical attachments at each end of the cell. These anti-foul cylinders are effective for 3 to 12 months

in waters with high rates of bio-fouling growth.

SAMPLE CALIBRATION DATA

CALIBRATION DATA FOR SENSOR SERIAL NUMBER = 677

CAUBRATION DATE: 9-29-89

Practical Salinity Scale 1978: C(35.15.0) . 4.2914 [Siemens/meter]

a = 2.1016638ge-{)5 b =3.92391126e-{)1

c = -3.79740447e+00 d ~ 1.53484144e-{)5

m = 3.9

BATH BATH BATH INST INST RESIDUAL

TEMP SAL COND FREO COND (INST - BATH)

[DC] [ppt] [81m] [kHz] [81m] [81m]

27.1023 15.0408 2.57988 8.67094 2.58007 0.00019

19.1355 15.0404 2.18995 8.08073 2.18980 -0.00015

11.08Q5 15.0392 1.81543 7.47017 1.81531 -{).00012

3.0062 1 5.0389 1.46~' 6.84567 1.46294 0.00000

31.0877 35.0571 5.9600ti 12.66879 5.96011 0.00005

23.0432 35.0782 5.11331 11.79726 ".11322 -{).00009

14.9669 35.0776 4.29664 10.88952 4.29660 -{).00004

6.8513 35.0768 3.52152 9.95016 3.52154 0.00002

.1.072S 35.0762 2.81736 Q.010Q3 2.81747 0.00011

O.(XXX) 0.0000 0.00000 3.11027 0.00003 0.00003

REFERENCES

[1) AM. Pederson, "A Modular High Resolution CTO System with Computer-Controlled Sample Rate", proceedings of International STC Conference

and Workshop, pp. 41-47, 1984.

[2] U.S. Patent No. 3,675,484

[3) AM. Pederson and M.C. Gregg, 'Cevelopment of a Small In-Situ Conductivity Instrument", IEEE Journal of Ocean Engineering, Vol. OE4, No"

3.~~. 69-75. July 1919.

SSE SEA ~ BIRD ELECTRONICS, INC.

~~ 1808 136th Place NE. Bellevue. W A. 98005 USA.

Telephone (206) 643~9866

Telex 292915 SBEI UR Fax (206) 643-9954
~:2 '2:7.1 ~~.:r

"~~~--'=':"~ .~

APPLIC.~TION NOTE NO. 20 Revised Aoril 1990

INSTRUCTIONS FOR CARE AND CLEANING OF CONDUcrlVITY CELLS

Since any conductivity sensor's output reading is proportional to its dimensions, it is important

to keep the cell clean of internal coatings. Also, cell electrodes contaminated with oil, biological

growths, or other foreign material, will cause low conductivity readinp.

If the cell is allowed to dry out between usage, salt crystals may form on (and in) the platinized

electrode surfaces. When the instrument is next used. there will be a delay before these crystals

are dissolved -- in the meantime. sensor accuracy may be affected. Therefore. we recommend

that the cell be kept filled with distilled or de-ionized water between uses. A len,th of 7/16- 10

Tygon tubing is provided for this purpose. to be connected in such a way that any air -entrapped

will be in the Tygon tube rather than in the cell.

An additional important benefit of keeping the cell ends closed with Tygon is to keep air-borne

contaminants (of which there are an abundance on most research vessels) from enterina the 'Celt.

If it is not practical to keep the cell filled with distilled water between use (for example, in Arctic

environments where freezing is a hazard), flush the cell with clean fresh water (preferably

distilled or de-ionized) and close the cell with Tygon. Also. remember to keep the Tygon in a

clean place (so that it does not pick up contaminantS) while the instrument is in use.

Experience indicates that in normal intermittent use (such as in CTD profiling operations). drift

rates of 0.0003 S/m (0.003 mmho/cm) or less per month can be expected without any cleaniaa

if the procedures described above are followed.

PRECA UTIONS!!!!!!

The conductivity cell is primarily made of glass, and therefore is subject to breakage if

mishandled. It is especially important to use the right size Tyson tubing, since if you use tubin.

with a too small ID, it will be difficult to remove the tubing, and the cell end may be brok.en if

excessive force is used. The correct size tubing for all instruments produced since 1980 is 7/16-

ID, 9/16- OD (1/16- wall). Instruments shipped prior to 1980 had sm311eret3inins ridges at the

ends of the cell, and 3/8- ID Tygon is the right size for these older instruments. It is betl.er to

use Tygon th3n other plastic tubing, since it tends to remain nexible over a wide ~mperature

range and with age.

Do not probe the interior or the cell with a Q- tip or other object, since if the platinized

electrode surface is touched it will be necessary to replatinize the cell.

If your instrument is filled with distilled water, do not subject it to low temper~tur.es which will

freeze the water and break the cell. Remove the water before shipment durine the winter, or to

Arctic reelons at any season. No adverse affects have been observed 3S 3, r.esult of remporary

-dry. storage, particularly if the cell is rinsed with fresh water beFore storace.

The anti-foulant used is a biological poison. Unnecessary handline of treated surfaces should

be avoided. and your hands thorouahly washed after contact.
CELL CLEANING

Routine CleaninQ (inside of cell not visiblv dirtv)

Fill the cell with a 1 % solution of Triton X-I 00. and let soak for 30 minutes. This is most easily

done by using a length of 7/16" ID Tygon tubing to form a closed loop including the cell. After

the soak, drain and flush with warm (not hot) fresh water for I minute. Refill the cell with

distilled water until the next usage.

Cleaning Severelv Fouled Cells (visible deDosits or marine growths on the inside of the cell)

Clamp the instrument so that the cell is vertical, and attach a length of 7/16" Tygon tubing to the

lower end of the cell. Use masking or other tape to secure the open end of the Tygon about even

with the top end of the cell. Pour Muriatic Acid (37% HCI) into the open end of the Tygon until

the cell is filled to near the top and let soak for I to 2 minutes only. Avoid breathing the acid

fumes!! Drain the acid from the cell and flush for 5 minutes with warm (not hot) fresh water.

Also rinse the exterior of the instrument to remove any spilled acid from the surface. Then fill

the cell with 1% Triton' solution, let stand for 5 minutes, and flush with warm fresh water for

I minute. Refill with distilled water until the next usage.

If this process does not remove the visible deposits, it will be necessary to mechanically clean the

cell with a small (0.275" diameter) soft-bristled nylon bottle brush and 1% Triton solution.

However, extreme care must be exercised, since the electrodes could be damaged if too large or

too stiff a brush is used. Also, it is absolutely essential that the electrodes be replatinized after

"brush" cleaning. Our service department will clean and replatinize your cell for a nominal fee.

ANTI-FOULANT ATTACHMENTS

SBE ~-O5 anti-foulant attachments are optional, and are recommended for moored applic:ltions

where biological activity is anticipated. These small porous cylinders are impregnated with a toxic

material, and are att3ched to each end of the conductivity cell, so that any w3ter which enters the

cell is treated. The SBE 4-05 attachments are effective for 6 months to I year. depending upon

biological activity and upon water flow velocity past the instrument.

-Triton X~IOO (a tr:lde name of J. T. Bnker. Inc) is a concentrated liQuid non-ionic deterient

available at most chemical or scientific supply stores. Other liquid detergents C:1n probably also

be used. but scientific grades are preferable because of their known composition. It is better to

use a non-ionic detergent since conductivity readings taken immediately after use are less likely

to be affected by any residual detergent left in the cell.

I
Washington 98005

Telex: 292915 seEI UR ~ ~~~~~~ .

:.- --'.;0.'1.;;"-"-"--

APPLICADON NOTE NO.3 lRe"lsed March 1989\

DISASSEMBL Y INSTRUCTIONS

FOR TEMPERATURE AND CONDUCTIVITY INSTRUMENTS

TEMPERATURE INSTRUMENT

Remove thennistor guard -- unscrews counter-clockwise.

Use wrench or vise on -natS- of the end cap (at thermistor end of the instrument) to unscrew the end

cap -- unscrews counter-clockwise. Use tape to pad wrench surfaces to prevent scratching the

anodized surface, and use extreme care not to damage the now unguarded thermistor sheath. When

reassembling, use care to avoid -cross-threading-.

CO ND ucn VnY IN STRU'ME NT

Remove cell guard -- 8 screws

Remove 2 screws and spacer block at the underwater connector end of the conductivity -cell tray.

Remove 4 screws holdin, the end cap to the main pressure housing. Leave cell tray att~hed to the

end cap.

Remove the end cap. This is most easily done by placing the end cap in a padded vise and pulling

on the main pressure housing. with a back-and-forth twisting motion. Use -care to avoid ex-cessive

motion when the pressure case slips off the end cap O-ring. since a sudden reduction in pulling forlCe

is required. Also. too Quick an opening can result in salt water trapped by the O-ring being! . ked

into the instrument onto the circuit boards.

If it is desired to further disnssemble the cell, unsolder and lift the 2 leads attached to the front of

the oscillator board. Note and mark which lead IDeS to each terminal, since they must not be

interchanged (the outer cell electrodes must be connected to the terminal closest to the 180uf

capacitors}. Then remove the 2 screws which secure the cell tray to the end C3p 'and carefully

separate the two, using a back-and-forth twisting motion.
-2

REASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS ;.:..

FOR n:MPERA TURE AND CONDUCTIVITY INSTRUMENTS

Clean and re-grease all O-ring surfaces. In general, it is not necessary to remove O-rings from their

grooves, since cleaning and re-greasing the exposed part of the O-ril:1s is usu:l.lly sutricient.

Each instrument case should be filled with dry nitrogen before closinc. For this procedure we use

a regulator to reduce the bottled Ni~rogen pressure to 20 psi, and us, a 10-inch,long, 1/8 inch 10

Tygon tube plumbed to the regulator. With the instrument almost closed, the tube cnn be slipped

down along the outSide of the ci.rcuit, boards toward the bottom of the case. Allow nitrOjen to flush

air out for several seconds, then Quickly pull out the tube and close the -case. This procedure C3n

more easily be done with 2 people.

0- RinK Sizes

5000 psi cases: Conductivity Cell: .P:l.rker TPO 01*

Conductivity End Cap: 'P~rk.er 2-219N674- iO

Temperature End Cap: Parker 2-220N67~- 70

10,000 psi cases: T - Rings are used rather than 0- rings

Conductivity Cell: -Parker TPO 01

Conductivity End Cap: \Parker TPO 20

Temperature End Cap: Parker TPO 21

Parker 2-017N674-70 with Impulse X'SG-3BCL-HP (1/2-20

thread as used on all current sitipmentS).

~onnectors (all pressures):

Previous standard was Parkef',2-019N674- 70 as used with

Advanced A306 (3/4-16 ttH:.e3d black aluminum-body

connectors). \7

Parker 2-213N674-10 was useii'on older instrumentS with

plastic: hex- based connectOrs. ~,'

. InstrumentS manufactur,ed before 1988 used Parker 2-010N674- 7J):at this position.
~¥=~~~~~~

APPLICATION BULLETIN NO.4

HOOKUP INSTRUCTIONS

FOR SBE-3 " SBE-4 INSTRUMENTS

@

", optional

"0 ground

connection

-Ef}-

Electronic] Ground --

Outside view of Connector Input to Ql ~

Inside View of Connector

To minimize chances of corrosion, avoid metal-to-metal contaCt of the insuument case with the

mounting device -- e.g., use insulating tape or head-shrink tubing over stainless steel hose clamps if

they are used to mount the instrument. Unless we have been instructed otherwise, all units are shipped

with the pressure case connected to electrical ground throulh a 1.5 uf capacitor. (n applications

subject to extremely high RF noise it may be necessary to connect the press cases directly to

electrical ground. This may be done by installing a jumper wire as shown in the sketch.'" :"Jtional

ground connection). For the conductivity instruments. this grounding point is not readily accessible.

and the optional ground connection may more easily be made by installing a jumper wire across the

leads of the 1.5 uf capacitor (blue color. located on the other circuit board). For instruments with

cases hardwired to electrical ground it may be necessary to use an isolated power supply (DC-Dc

converter or battery) to prevent galvanic corrosion. A single power source may be used to supply a

mixed group of temperatu.re and conductivity instruments.

The instrument case is filled with dry nitrogen. If it is necessary to open- the -case at any time, it

would be a good idea to refill the case with nitros,en to prevent possible condensation at low

temperatures. Application Bulletin No.3 contains instructions for opening and closing the instrument

cases, and for filling them with nitrQlen.
SEA-BIRD ELECTRONICSJ INC.

1808 . 136th Place Northeast. Bellevue. Washington 98005

~ !..-!..~, Telephone: (206) 643.9866 Fax: (206) 643-9954 Telex: 292915 SBEI UR

IMPORTANT NOTE

The conductivity instrument in this shipment is different from earlier units in that it has a special

modification which allows the instrument to read conductivity over the entire range from 0 to 60 +

mmhos/cm. We expect that this change will be standard in future units. A precision 5000 ohm

resistor (with 1 ppm T .C.) has been added in parallel with the conductivity cell. The result of this

change is that the instrument oscillator will never see greater than 5000 ohms resistance, even when

no water or fresh water is in the cell. Thus the minimum instrument frequency will never be less

than about 2500 to 3000 Hz, well within the optimum frequency range of the oscillator. The

calibration sheet shows the frequency of the instrument after being flushed several times with

distilled water and then read with no water in the cell.

The health of the instrument oscillator can be checked by the customer at any time by testing under

similar conditions. If the frequency is more than 2 or 3 Hz different than that shown in the

calibration sheet, the oscillator may be defective. Note that if the instrument is tested with water

in it, it will have to be flushed several times with distilled water in order for the frequency to

approach the test frequency. In fact, our tests indicate that even when well flushed, the frequency

with distilled water will always be a few Hz higher than our test frequency, so the test should

actually be done with no water in the cell. We also find that de-ionized water has a lower

conductivity than distilled water, approaching no-water conditions. The test frequency willllQ! give

you any indication about whether the conductivity cell needs cleaning or not.

We have also devised a new conductivity curve fitting equation using a "least squares" program for

the IBM PC. The new equation. almost without exception. will give a better fit than our old

equation. The equation is:

(arm + br2 + c + dt)

Conductivity = Siemens per meter

10 (1-9.57e-8 p)

where Conductivity is in Siemens/meter, f is the instrument frequency in kHz, t is the temperature

in degree~ C, and a, b, c, d & m are constants determined by the program. A handy feature of the

equation is that it can be used for both the old and new versions of the SBE-4 instrument--"c" is

very small for the old instrumentS which do not have the condu "vzty offset resistor in them. The

program initially picks a value of "m" and then does a "least squares" calcul~,ir;n to determine the a,

b, c & d values. The program then iterates "m" by 0.1 and computes a, b, c & d again. It continues

to do this until it finds a minimum in the quantity "sum of the absolute value of the fitting errors".

The whole calculation takes a couple of seconds if the PC system has the 8087 co-processor. A

separate file is created for each instrument. This file contains all calibrations for that instrument,

so that it is easy to plot several calibrl1tions on the same sheet, showins instrument drift over time.

Thus, when instrumentS are recnlibrated, data sheets can en.sily be created to show drift relntive to

the orevious calibration.
JANUARY 1991 163 NGWLMS ILSP

E.9 WATER TEMPERATURE
JANUARY 1991 164 NGWLMS ILSP
!L.IJ

"., ~~

-JW

IX-<

x<x0

lf1-

~

x

<t ~0

U1

8

,~

e

-nJ

:;J:;.J:;J:;JR~ ~~~~QV

oooO~v

uuu~~~

MI

~, ~d

L.J NZ<

Co.)

-1~>~

I.Jz~~

0-

C'

LoJI

'2:1

IoJI

Q..~ <

!-

\D..,.('J\D-~

~--, QC

== C\J C\J ,. t-. ("\

o gcln

0'~~0"G\C7\ QQQQCc)

\

~1n"C¥)N-

~iS<t:«~\.JL.J,--

i--~- I 1

\DI

, I

~!

1;'

I,...1

'\0

r-.1

'0\'

.,.:: c

0, ~

Q.. ~

I..J

~, ~

,

,

-1UZzcu

r...

'ot" I

0- NQI

t;1

'ot" - I

<t

\D'

e'

Mi

",!

%!

d,

Z,

0:,

'-J1

CUI

,-g:

-JI

0-1

~I Z

%, C

C.J

I~I2. -

1

~! I

,~'

~I

:=1

~I

'~I

'-"I ;:J,

<,

Q)' -

d' au

.N:

'n]I 0~

V) ~

~I <

t.J1T 1... ~MM

'"Nd:~~

;.oJ w~<

Co.)

""" I

~~

(::J z

11

~z-~

::

V?

0..' =

<~~

\C

QI

r-. ~-

c..

V)

'~I

iC)1 ~~ I

~-I

LJ~ I

Q,

g:

80I 

Z

~~

r-.o:

~~

~f\

--

#

(..J ~

oct ~

t-~

<C

('L

~~

~: Q~

Ioji' = 

:

...~.

~?

~~:

~

..I -a

't:

~- oW

~.

~. 0

Q.

~.

C>

(J~

~~

-

:.0,

co~~

~

> <tl

~ .I

0, d l.J d 1.1 0' I

1 I

I..D

~ -00,

~I~I

~Q'I

~ z

I-~~

oct

~ 0

=i -

>- ~ ~i

.7: .. COI ~:' :z ~ ""-- I

'~ ~ ~I

-t

.~

W'

~ ~

: ~ 01

~ -oJ ("'1/1

f- ;.. I-t-I

~ i 0...1 I

~~~~~~ I U ,~q ~ - I

~...~ ~ ~

t ~. I

~ MZ 1.1 ~ ' ~ g ~1-

- ~~ Z ~ I

-,~ c: < '

0. .' I

I..J" ~

~~

c..z

;jt3~

:ii~

:So

-<

~2

~~

~5LoJ

I'-LW

~~

~~

~ffi

t-

~~

~X '~ 

c

:~ to.)

to)

'SECTION

-1-

.O9S"OirC--== :;=

# 32 Tinned

Teflon Tube Teflon Insulation Copper Wire

~ t 1 3" L.ng-

."~DI;!;;;:~~~~: ==

-r-r---2" Min. -I

YSI thermistors provide highly accurate and stable

temperature sensing for applications of temperature

measurement, control, indication and compensation.

Typical uses include precise measurements without the

necessity of individual circuit calibration and with the advantage of precision interchangeability of sensors. Precise

cold junction compensation of thermocouples may be

designed directly without "bread boarding" after

mathematically deriving the circuit because of the superior

interchangeability of YSI precision thermistors.

Two interchangeability tolerances and two thermistor

configurations are offered. Teflon encased thermistors

allow exposure to hostile environments such as conductive or corrosive liquids and particulate suspensions. A

stiff wire placed in the tube also allows the thermistor leads

to be formed to various shapes with slight finger pressure.

Stor8g8

Temper8ture

and Working

Temperature

ForBest

Stability

°C

Ordering

P8r1Numa T8fton

St8nd8rd Enc:8Md

Maximum

Worting

Temperature

"C

Pow.-

Re8IsIanC8

Ohms

@25"C

RnI8Ia.-

Ratio

25 to 125"C

CoIorCode

Body End

44001 A

44OO2A

44OO3A

44035

:!:0.2OC .. =

Interchangeability 44007

Tolerance 44017

Oto 75~ =

t 44008

;:. 44011

.. 44014

44015

100

300

1000

1000

2252

3000

5(XX)

~

10K

1OK

3OK

100K

3OOK

1MEG

:1.0% 10.87

:1.0% 15.15

:1.02% 17.33

:1.02%(-40» +150) 17.33

: 1.02% 29.26

:!: 1.02% 29-26

:1.02% 29.26

:!:1.02% 29.26

: 1.02% 29.26

:!: 1.0% 23.51

:1.0% 29.15

:!: 1.03% 34.82

:1.1% 46.02

:1.2% 61.96

100

100

100

100

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

150

- 80 10 + 50 Black Brown

- 80 10 + 50 Black Red

- 80 10 + 50 Black Orange

- 80 10 + 50 Orange Green

- 80 10 + 120 Black Yellow

- 80 to + 120 Black Green

- 80 10 + 120 Black Violet

- 80 to + 120 Brown Violet

- 80 to + 120 Brown Blue

-8010 +120 Black Blue

-8010 +120 Black Gray

- 80 to + 120 Brown Brown

-80 10 + 120 Brown Yellow

- 80 10 + 120 Brown Green

-

441

441

441

441

441

441

441

441

~

Orange

Orange

Orange

Orange

Orange

Orange

Orange

44033

:!: O. 1 OC 44030

Interchangeability ::=

Tolerance 44037

0 to 75OC 44031

44032

2252

3000

5000

10K

6K

10K

3OK

:to.51%

:to.56%

:to.56%

:to.51%

:to.S1%

:to.S1%

:0.51%

29.26

29.26

29.26

29.26

29.26

23.51

29.15

75

75

75

75

75

75

75

-so

-so

-so

-so

-so

-so

-80

-

TOLERANCE CURVES AND TABLES Oata Indicating conformance to resistance temperalure

vlluII III ml"mUm In!"clllngIIDlilly "'01 ,.p"llid bo!h ,~ t.mpillt.'. Inllill ..

01 rellSllno. Ir' shown on plg~ 7

RESISTANCE TEMPERATURE DATA Tlbll~JndIOlU"; the prtdlottd ptrfo,mlnot of YSI pIle"

lIon Ihlrmiltoll In 0 C Ind In 0 F all shown on plgls 10 Ihrough 12 Thl$ dill mlY bl

u$Id dll.otly in dillan ot R 1 networks Ind ',mp"II.,e mlll.,eme"1 Iyst,ms

TIME CONSTANT Thl lime required tor a Ihlrmlslor w Indicate 63., of a newly Impressed

Ilm"rl!lIr, !llnl !lml ~onlllnl For IlhlrnllllO' !!!ID,ndld by !II I"d! In I w,II!!lI',d

011 balh II 1& 1 SIC max for &llndlrd Ihl,ml&lOr and 25 lit nlax lor Tllion Inca SId

!herml!!O'S In SI!II "r II I! 1 0 let ~.x tor !Iand.rd thlrmrstors Ind 25 set mex tor

Tetlon entl!ed Ihermlstors

DISSIPATION CONSTANT Thl power In m,lIlwalts reqUired 10 raIse a thlrmlSlor ,"C above

su"oundlnG I,mp'lllu" IS Ihl dlSSlplllon conSllnl Fo' III Ihtrm,stors s!!sptndld by

Ihelr le.ds In. well'st"'ld 011 balh 'lIS 8mW °C mln, or ImWoC In Slrll"r

!:TAo ILI'"" Y~I

l "r-' 1 1 I hmr-lf ! "10 ond n, -,-nl"nlf IHcrod'" ,n- or 'x .. 0 I' ""Iml 01 II L'.IY ",. 0 Ig..y ,,-., IV 9

po!url to slrong nutller radl'llon

HOW TO ORDER

Ult the Ibolle PI" number,

~

4

ToIer8nm

%R

Oto7O"C

oc

05

07

06

08

11

14

15

Orange

Black

Yellow

Blue

Violet

Brown

Red

to"

to"

to"

to .,

to"

to"

to"

1-75

,.75

1-75

,.75

,.75

,.75

.75

JANUARY 1991 169 NGWLMS ILSP

E.10 WATER PRESSURE
JANUARY 1991 170 NGWLMS ILSP
~ -'.{Il

RANGE

(melersofwaler)

01010

...010 20

.010 60

. . . . . .. 0 10 130

. . . . . .. 010200

010270

010600

0101400

0102000

0104000

0107000

FEATURES

. FULLY SUBMERSIBLE

. LOW POWER CONSUMPTION

. LONG LINE DRIVING CAPABILITY

. QUARTZ CRYSTAL FREQUENCY OUTPUTS

. CALIBRATED OVER WIDE TEMPERATURE RANGE

MODEL

8010.. ,

8020 ,

8060 .,

8130 .'

8200,.

8270..

8600..

881400

882000

884000

887000

APPLICATION AREAS

. OCEANOGRAPHY

. RESERVOIR LEVEL

. TSUNAMI DETECTION

. WAVE AND TIDE GAUGES

. UNDERWATER PIPE LAYING

. OFFSHORE PLATFORM LEVELING

The SERIES 8000 DIGIOUARTZ@) DEPTH SENSORS incorporate the PAROSCIENTIFIC quartz crystal pressure transducers

in a self-contained submersible arrangement. These high performance water level sensors have a sensitivity of better than a

millimeter of water at depths of thousands of meters. They are well suited for remote and ship deployed oceanographic

applications because of their high accuracy. long term stability. low power consumption. and long line driving capability.

The depth sensor consists of a sealed pressure case. fabricated from 316 stainless steel, which houses a pressure transducer

in a protective shock mount. The transducer is wired internally tothe depth sensor's underwater connector. Pressure inputs are

transmitted either by connecting to the pressure port or by total submersion. An interrfal, flexible, oil filled tube transmits

pressure directly to the transducer and avoids the need for an isolation diaphragm.

The depth sensor may be used for real-time data acquisition or in logging systems where hydrostatic pressure is recorded

digitally on magnetic tape or in solid state memory. Application areas include monitoring of reservoir. lake, and river levels,

tidal and sea slope measurements, as well as tsunami, wave, and seiche studies. Pipe laYing and platform leveling can be

accomplished using multiple depth sensors.

Integral electronics include protection against power surges and electrical transients The low impedance pressure output

signal is capable of driving cable lengths of several thousand meters, A quartz crystal frequency output temperature signal

may be used for thermal compensation of pressure information, These frequency signals are easily interfaced to the SERIES

700 DIGIOUARTZ~ PRESSURE COMPUTER providing a system capable of reading out in your choice of depth or

pressure units

~~-- PrOduct ael'neG Dy S~C"ocat'on Control DrawonV ~anufacl"reCI un~r On. or more of Ih. followong US Patent. 3.470.400" 3.47V.536. 4.089058 - 4.215.570 . 4.321.500.4.312.173

4.382.385.4.384.495 - 4.406."6. 4.4S4.770. 4455.874.4.479.391.4.531.073.4.592.663 Oll\8r ~I.nt. pending

. -,.,.- Tr8d8m..k of PAROSCIENTfFIC INC ' CopyrIV'" 1986 by PAROSCIEIITIFIC. INC

JANUARY 1991 175 NGWLMS ILSP

E.12 METEROLOGICAL TOWERS

E.12.1 BRACKETED STEEL TOWER
JANUARY 1991 176 NGWLMS ILSP
L=R:~)

HOT DIP GALVANIZED

GENERAL USE

Genera' Purpose CommunicatIOn or ~8vy.Outy TV Tower 1

uility a Iremendou8ly wide range or lower ~.

DESIGN

Built on a 12y," eQuilateral triangular design with continuous It

cross-br~ing entirely eI~triC welded and fabrICated In pre(

ment, The 8 "zig-zag" braces per 10' sectIOn ~n more IMn us

CONSTRUCTION .

UneQualled StUrdIness. , ' Extra heavy-duty 1%" steel tubi",

side rails, resulting in far greater strength and stUrdlneu tN

found in this size tower SUPERIOR STRENGTH, , has .Iway

most in ROHN towers, This is 8ChieYed by setting ngid high.

the steel used, These standards .re constantly malnt.ined

testing according to acceoted laboratory procedures so Qu.liIy I

It 8 a natural conclusion th8t ~ Quality InVredients .,. eo

precisiOn manufacturing and proven design the result IS a hi

product!

FINISH

Famous ROHN Hol-Dlp a.lvaniled long-lite finiStl tM "

coating ever known. Rust-Proots and gIves an always attractive

Every Inch, Including InsltJeof entIre tower, evenly and~e

with zinc after fabrication,

ENGINEERING DATA

ROHN superIOr engineering means 8d~ design.., ttus r

best tower for the need. Or tOday! Thll is Droven becauee ~

at least 33% stronger and more durable'" Slmtler _e end

round on the market todey At the same time, the ROHN produ

means lower cOsts", giving you a tower actuellycosting .e..

towers, Get the best ' , , look et the No 25G carefully end you'

SPECIAL FEATURES

The No 25G uses double-bolted joints , proven the best me

ing tower sections for sturdiness and dependability The e,

or the No 25G allows it to be self-lUpportlng provided e tIOuI

used and ~n go 35 feet 8bOVW this brecket under normel.co/'

instructiOn sheet) Under most guy.a conditions the No 25<

to heights of 200 feet! wne,. SOK..I condlt1QnS or unulual a

ing reQuirements must be met, we suggest you cont8Ct the

Department for complete InformatiOn. Assembly bOlts anti nut;

";'hln 1 lep of each to_r sectiOn,

SELF-SUPPORTING HEIGHTS FOR 2SG TOWE

FRIor of ..",,-1,1 FWtNO LOAD No, ARI, 2 Ft' No

10,0 PSF {50 M~H) 72,.' '.,1' 18

14.4 PSF (10 MPH) 10,4' 521' 48,

200PSF:707MPH) 5t,3' 43,1 41"

"see Installatlol

" "Recommend..

6718 West Plank Road

P.O. Box 2(xx). Peoria. Illinois'6~

Phone: 3O9.'697.44QO

TWX 910-SS2-0646
~'.::- -: .; ~

. l- - --- -

. p"-'-. - . .:~~, - ,.

~-r: -- -

~ ¥~-"" ~

.=>~

~.'.;:' ~ - ~.. .. ,-:, .-::' -"""")'

..0

~~ -" ~ , ~.-:~-r

EB2525G

UNIVERSAL EAVE BRACKET

H8U

UNIVERSAL HOUSE BRACKET

HB25AG 0-15"

HB25BG 0-2." ,__I

HB25CG 0.-" '__I

AOUSTA8l£ HOUS! BRACKET

GA2SQ

GUY AS~M8L'

-_WI

G82IQ

GUY BRACKET ONLY

SAMS v

SAFETY AttIG

~~

f: iI

~

I i. ':

I : ..,.. .\ '--~ ~\.

~~~~t-..£a..

,.'- '.

For Ii!hft9

1 . 10' 8K11On

"8"-

,..".

.-.~~ WP25G

WORK PLATFORM

EF 25.5

ERECTION ~'XTUAE

25ACL \ ANTI.c1.1M8 ~TIO~

\/.
:~

, l ~

..

DT25

DRIVE TOOL

for DR 25G

?

..

~

~

Ii

-

I,

'I :1 i

~

~

.,

I,

71

I.

,

!i!

DR25G *

2' DRIVE RODS

set of 3

SB25G

3'4" SHORT BASE

sectIon tor concr.'.

SBH25G.

3'4' HINGED SHORT BASE

secllon for concrele

.

~~ 1\

. .

\

\~ft

.,

"-

.. \

J.-'

.c-

, .

,~ "

BPC25G*

CONCRETE BASE PLATE

BP25G.

BASEPLATE

Ilor use wIth drive rodsl

BPH250'

HINGED BASE PLATE

tor concrete

20BG

3' TOP SECTION

. ,.,:;- :II" I'

~ ~ .. .

~

_-4'

.

.. !(..'

'~2'O'

FLAT ROOF MOUNT

aD1210.

SINGLE DRIVE.IN BASE

°Note: Towers mounted on these bases must be bracketed or guyea

Copyright 1983 Rohn . All rights reserved.
7\";

--~, -- . "':--f

:t. '. i

~ ;

SA25G II

67" SIDE ARM

[~ , ~"...,

~I I

:~_t ~.~ '

t

;

.. I

.1

ii

RP2SG

ROTOR POST AS25G on 25AG . Top - H~ G8I/I -.. ~

'-"-1' SA253UA - SlOE ARM BRACKET

-

AP25G CM

SPECIAL ~OTO~ ~5T

T850 ,Yo" ID, 2" OD

TOwER BUSHING

too 11M In 2OAG or 2SAG Top ~

T875 'Va"ID, 2" OD 1--1

./ -

-.,.-,..::' ,..

. :: "0: ~o~:;.;

AS2SQ

ACCES~Y SHIL'

1tor M_.1 A8

HA~WOOO BEAAING

"-"~T.~

..,.OO~

25TDM2 '-

TOP DISH MOUNT

-,-,~C-1IO7U --~I

" ~

,- - .

; '- ---I

I -..

~...,-:,.' ,~ -:..~.:':;'iY! v- -

1 .

T83

THRUST BeARING

2" 0.0 TUBING

T84

THRUST BeARING

3" 00 TUi;ING

('*-,

SASZ&Q

BEARING; ACCESSORY

"" SHEL~

~.

~1:.--

""

UHF2SG

SIDE AR~. ~O\INT

!or U"F & FM ...,

APL25G

TOP BEACON PLATE

I

;.~ , ---

~

ADDITIONAL INFORMATION

00 "

-""'--" "

o ~_. 0"_"---""-- -" "-

, 'form 84-1393

-IN~INUS

&81 - ---01'... - .. -

-- -"---

- r 
JNSTALLATJOR: Se1ect 1 to.er 1oclt1on suff1c1ent1y c1elr Ind out of f1111"9 d1st8nCe of power T1nes s1~

every e1ectr1cl1 Ind te1ephone w1re shou1d be cons1dlred dlngerous. The on'y saf.e d1stancl fr08 ,o.er l1nes 1s

at 1ellt tw1ce the he1ght of to.er. .ast. and Inten~. Tower shou1d be 1nsta11ed by exper1enced and tra1ned

person.el. A11 Intenn. 1nsta11at1ons 8Ult be grounded per 1oc.1 or nat1on.1 codes.

BASE: The size of the concrete base for I SO' 125 to.er. with I bouse bracket 12' lbovegrouftd. is ]' deep by

~Squlrl. For cases of 1oose 1011. etc.. the base .vlt be 1lrg1r. Spread about 2. of grlYl1 in bottaa of

h01e prior to setting base Isse8b1y. The base Isse8b1y shou1d be attached to the first 10' ~t1on prior to

sitting into frlve1. After sett1nt base asse8b1y on fr1Ye1. fi11 another ]. with frlYe1 around 11" of bel..

This 111ows the tower base 1e9s to extend the required amount be1ow the base of the concrete. thus 111ow1", for

drainage of ~isture Into the vr1Yl1. The base al'.-b1y end first 10' section 'hou1d be 11ve1ed. plumbed. and

te.porlri1y 9Uyed or braced Whil1 pourint the concrete. Th1s w111 insure I plU8b to.er .fter 1nstl11ltion.

Che~k t~ to ISSUrw It " p1i8 Ind 11ve1 Ifter pour1", co"c~t.. Do not pu11 base UP 1nto the concrete to

1eYll it and do not drive 1t hard 1nto 9round as this plu9S leg ho11s and prevents 8Oilture dra1na9l. Crown

the ~ of till ~te s11gt1t11 to prevent ~Iter accI8l1.t1.. Do not use drive rods as I base for to.!' ..

set 1n concNte.

HEIGHT If' ~ , BRACXET USES: House brackets .,st be used and ..st be _ted at leot 12' aboYeground to be

effective. The fZ5 tower should not extend 80" th8n 33' above a house br8ctet. (Note: T.o house br8cketl

8re to be used. equ811y spaced. on the 10' to.er.) To secure the house bracket. use 18g screws no I..ller th8n

3,.. x Z-. A speci81 effart shOuld be -.de to locate the house bracket such th8t the lag screws 90 through the

siding into a stud. Br8ckets fastened to the siding only will not hold in a high wind. Tighten the hOuse

bracket U-bolU only enough to prevent loose_II. Do not dent or flatten the t~ upr1gt1t ~" by esceslively tighteni.. u-boltl. . - -- - -- ..

~: Nuts Ind bolts Ire loclted tn tower letS. Instille" Ire urged to use I 10- ltnt"9-'" ~ tIIat

tape" fro. Ibout 1/2. to 5/32. diameter oyer I 6-1/2. length. If bolts clnnot be pushed through the holes

with the heel of the hind wIIt1e rocking the tower. do not h_r th- throu... Clrefu11y drtve the pundl tnto

the hole just enough to sltght1y enlarge it. The leg bo1t hole should be just llrge enough to Id8tt the bolt.

Never drt11 out the holes. Ie sure to tighten 111 leg bo1ts untt1 they pirttilly f11tten the sleeves. ClUstftt

the sleeves to Ictuilly grip the legs inside. Alw81S repl.ce stripped bolts. Upon co.plettng an tnstillatton.

there stlOl/ld be no verttcl1 ~~t bet.-ell t~ sectt~ It the joints wIIeft the t-.r ts deltberltely sw..,.

fr8 stde to s-..

MISCELLANEOUS: Insta11at1on is preatly hastened and s18P11f1ed by the use Of ~ erection ft.t.r.. Do not Ute

it to 11ft ~,. th~ the we1ght of one twer section It I t1_. Ant1-cl1- secttons IN rec_nded fw 111

t-. to preYeftt ...autllortzed persOM f~ cl1_t", ~.

CAUTI~: ... Ie sure IIt:r bo1tl ~ IItnged type accessories Ire 1oosened bef~ It~ttng to lit. t~ ower.

H1nge up ~ ~re tIIln 33 of'25 tu.er 0111,. A11 IIinged type bases Ire rec_nded to be uHd to rltle tGIer

on11 without Intenfta. Wilen raising Ind 1owertng tower on any type of IItn91 bile Dr IItnge section. tile 1D8d1

IPP1ted for 111ngtng tile t~r .,st be IPP1ted equ111, - botll sides of t~ tn DrGer to reduce tile PDsstbt1tt1

of twist ~ tower Ind IItn9ls It tile base. Spectl1 clre .,st be taken to Ivotd tile use of raising and 1owert..

_tIIods MltcII NY cluse dIN9I to tower or IIt.$.

.

A11 1nformltt- is based upon Intennas wttll ~t .ore tllin 2 squire feet of lrea 1" I ZO pst (70 8Ph) wind 1D8d

and I slfet, factor. wttll antennl 1nst1118d It tower 1Pea.

See C"art 1-61111' for .,. 1nf_t1~ . --guyed t~.

NOTE: A11 typal of .ntenftl inst.11.tions ,hou1d be thorOU9h1, inspected by au81ified pers~1 at 1east twice

ii;;iar and re.arked with h.z.rd and warning 1.be1s to insure 5a'.t, 8nd proper ptrf~~.

D1..ant11.. of lIlY t~ shou1d be- done by profess10ft81 and exper1enc8d 1nst811_" a sect1.. at . t1- w1t11 tM

use of an erect1on f1atur8.

PART 11MB

2SGO~

2SG04.-KT

2SGOSOIRXT

2S~

ZSGO7C8XT

2S~UIT

~' C~lete 8rlCket- T~

40' C~l.te BrlCketed T~

SO' C~lete 8rlCketed T~

60' C~l.te Brlcketed Tower

70' Cu.plete Br.~teted Ta.er

~. C~lete BrlCket- T~

Refer to 11DhlbetiCI1/_riCI1 ~ice list for reference sheet "rices mI C~1ete 12SG brlcketed T~.

SPKlfICATIC*S Sl&a:CT TO CHA& WITIOIT *'TIC[.
DIIR-RC»III

Aaa88bly IDfoCMt.ion

Bracketed 120 aDd 125 Towecs, Non-Cuved

SITE SELECTION: select a tower loca~ion alltficiently clear and Ollt. of talli"9 diat.ance of ,.wer linea

aince every electrical and telephone wire abould be consideCed dangecous. The only .afe aiat.ance {com

power lines is at l.aat twice the hei9ht of tower, ..a~. and an~enna co;Dined. Tower 5bolllo De Inatalled and di...nt.led by experienced and trained per.oAftel. All ant.enna in8t.allat.iona 8Y8t be 9CouAde~

per local or nat10~1 codea.

BASB: The aile of the concrete ba.e for a bracketed 120 tower, with A hou.e bracket 12' abov~r0UA4, ia

Jideep by 188 aquare. The baae for a bracketed 125 tower ia 3' deep by 188 equace. ,or caaea of loo.e

nil, e~c.. the ba.e au.t be lar,er. Spr.ad about 28 of 'Jr.".l in bott08 of bol. prior t.o 8Kt.iD9 bA..

.".-Dly. Tbe beee aeeeebly ehould be attaeaed to the firet 10' aeetion prior to eettiDf iato ,~.v.l.

Aft.r .e~~1ng ba.. a.e.8bly GO grav.l, fill another 38 wi~b gravel around leg. of ba... Tbie .110W8 the

tower baee leg. to e.tend the required .80uat below ~he baee of the concrete, tbue allowiDg for draiaa,e

of 8Oie~ure in~o ~be gravel. Tbe baee a.a.-bly and firet 10' aection abould be leveled, plu8Ded, and

temporarily guyed or braced while pouring the concrete. Tbia will iD8ure . plU8b tower after iD8tallation. Check tower to aa.ure it ia plW8b and level after pouring concrete. DO not pull ba8e up iDto the

concrete to level it aDd do Dot drive it bard iato ground .. tbia plug. l~ bolea and pceven~. 8Oi.~ure

drainage. crown the top of ~he concrete .11gbtly to preveat water accuaula~iOft. DO not uae dr i ve roda

.a . bae. fo~ towe~ vhen .et ift con~r.t..

HEIGHT OP TOWER , BRAC~ET USES: Ho~.e brackets .uat be ~aed and abo~ld be 8O~nt.a at ~.a.t 12' aDOvegro~nd to be effective. Tbe 120 tower .bo~ld not ex~end 8Ore tban 28' (maxi8ua) abov. a bouae bc~ket

and tbe 125 tower 8bo~ld not extend 8Ore than ]]' (..Xi8U8) aboVe a bou.. br.cket. (Note: TWO b~u.e

brackets .re to be used, equally apaeed, on tbe 80' 125 tower.) TO .ec~re tbe houae bc~ket, U.. l.g

screws no 88811er than ]/'8 x 28. A .pecial effort .bould be ..de ~o locate the nouse Dc8Cket sucn that

tbe l.g .crews go tbrougb tbe sidint into a 8tud. Brack~a fa~ened to tbe .idint only will not bold in

a bigb wind. Tigbten tbe bou.e braeket U-bolta only eftQUgb to prevent loosen..s. DO Dot dent or fla~~en

tbe tower upright -..bera by exeeaaively tigbtening V-bolt..

~: ,uta and bolta are loeated in tower l~. Inatall.fa are urged to U8e a 108 linift9-~p puDeh tbat

tapers fraa aboue 1/2- eo 5/32- di..e~ oyer a '-1/28 lenftA. If bol~. C8nDOC be pu.bed ~broU9b the

bol.. with the beel of a band while rocking tbe tower, do not ba...r tbee tbrou9b. carefu~ly drive the

puDeh into tbe hole j~.t enoUfb eo alifbely enlarge ie. Tbe 189 bole bole .hould be ju.e lac.e eftOU9b

to ad_it the bolt. Never drill OUt tbe holes. .e .ure to ti9hten all 189 bolts until t~ pectial1y

bolts. Upon eoepleting an in8tallation, there .hould be no vectieal 8Ov..ent between tOW8C at

the jointa vben the tower ia deliberately avayed fraa aide to aide.

MISCELLANEOUS: Inatallat1on 1a greatly baatened aDd ai8plified with the uae of an erection fixture. DO

not uae it to lift ~re than the weigbt of one tower .ection at a ti... If the an~enae ia to be fixed

aDd a .et .erew u.ed in the mast bousiog, or if a rotator ia to be mounted on a abort length of ..at

above ebe tower top aection, in8tall a TaSO tower bu.bing at bottaa of the ..at bou.iog to center tbe

...t in the ...t bouain,. Tbe.e busbinga are 8peened8 in pl.ce. If tbe rotator i. to be 8OuDted inaide tbe top aeetio~ of the tower, do Dot inatall a TaSO tower bu8bing at botCaa of ..at bouaiog.' Anticli~ sectiona are reeoamended on all towers to prevent unautborized pecaODa fraa cli8blng ~owec.

CAUTION ... Be aure binge bolt. on biDged t~ accea80ries are loo..ned before ~~e8Pti.g co binge tower

over. HiAge up no 8Ore th8JI ]]' of 125 or 2" of 120 tower only. All hinged type ba..s He reco_nded

to be u.ed to raiae tower only without antenna. Whe. rai.inv and lowering tower on 8Jly binved ~ype be..

or binge aection, the loads applied for hinging tbe tower 8uat be applied eq~ally on ~~ .ide. of tbe

towec in ordec to reduce tbe poa.ibility of tviat on ~ower and bingea at tbe be... Special care 8Uat be

taken to avoid the uae of raiaiog and lowering ..thoda which ..y cause da..ge to tower or biftges. Ringed

ba... and roof 8Ounted tower. .bould only be inatalled and di...ntled by profea.ional and expertenceo in-

.tallera.

All type. of antenna in.tallationa 8bauld be thoroughly inspected by qualified per.ORnel at l..at tw~

a year and re..rked with hazard and warning label. to 1naure aafety and proper pecfor..nce.

Di...ntliDg of any tower .hould be done by pcofes.ional and experienced in~.llera a a.ction at . ~1"

with tbe us. of an erection f1xtuce.

All infor..tion i8 ba..d upon _ver-ge antennas, with ftO 8Ore t.han 2 aqua:. l...t of -r.- in & 20 ps! 170

~I wind load and - 8afety factor, vith antenAa in~alled at ~ov.r -pel.

THESE ARE FACTORY TESTED INSTRUCTIONS. PLEASE FOLLOW CAR£FULLY. ~-~--

copyr igbt 191' ~ UNR-Rohn.
.WARNING: INSTALLATION OR DISMANTLING OF THIS PRODUCT NEAR POWER LINES IS DANGEROUS.

YOUR SAFETY, FOLLOW THE SAFETY DIRECTIONS..

FOR

INSTALLATION AND DISMANTLING SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS -- YOU, YOUR ANTENNA, AND SAFETY

Each year hundreds of people are killed, mutilated, or receive severe permanent injuries

when attempting to install or dismantle an antenna. In many of these cases, the victim was

aware of the dangers of electrocution and failure but did not take adequate steps to avoid

the hazard.

For your safety and to help you achieve a good installation, please READ and FOLLOW the

safety precautions below. THEY MAY SAVE YOUR LIFE:

1. If you are installing or dismantling an antenna for the first time, please, for your

own safety as well as others, seek PROFESSIONAL ASSISTANCE. Consult your dealer. He can

explain which mounting or dismantling method to use for the size and type antenna you are

about to install or dismantle.

2. select your installation site with safety, as well as performance, in mind.

formation on Site Selection.) REMEMBER: POWER LINES AND PHONE LINES LOOK ALIKE.

SAFETY, ASSUME THAT ANY OVERHEAD LINES CAN KILL YOU.

(see inFOR YOUR

3. Call your power company. Tell them your plans and ask them to look at your site.

is little inconvenience, considering YOUR LIFE IS AT STAKE.

This

4. Before you begin, plan your installation or dismantling procedure carefully. successful installation or dismantling of a mast or tower is largely a matter of coordination.

Each person should be assigned to a specific task and should know what to do and when to do

it. One person should be designated as the .boss. to callout instructions and watch for

signs of trouble.

5. When installing or dismantling your antenna, REMEMBER: DO NOT use a metal ladder. -

NOT work on a wet or windy day or if a thunderstorm is approaching. DO dress properly -.

ShOes with rubber soles and heels, rubber gloves, long sleeve shirt or-jacket.

DO

6. If the assembly starts to drop, get away from it and let it fall. REMEMBER: The

antenna, mast, cable, and metal guy wires are all excellent conductors of electrical

current. Even the slightest tou~~ of any of these parts to a power line completes an

electrical path through the antenna and the installer -- THAT'S YOU:

7. If any part of the antenna system should contact a power line -- DON'T TOUCH IT OR TRY

TO REMOVE IT YOURSELF. CALL YOUR LOCAL POWER COMPANY. They will remove it safely.

8. If an electrical accident should occur -- DON'T grab hold of the person.in contact with

the power line or you too will be electrocuted. use a DRY board, stick or rope to push or

pull the victim away from the antenna. If the victim has stopped breathing, administer

artificial respiration -- and stay with it. Have someone call for medical help.

SITE SELECTION: Before attempting to install your antenna, think where you can best place

your antenna for ~~ and performance. To determine a safe distance from wires, power

lines, and trees: 1) Measure the height of your antenna: 2) Add this length to the length

of your tower or mast: and then, 3) Double this total for the minimum recommended ~

distance.

If you are unable to maintain this safe distanc@,~! GET PROFESSIONAL HELP. G@n@rally,

the higher the antenna is abovegrouna, the better it performs. Good practice is to install

your antenna above the root lin8 ana away from power 11nes And obstructions. Remember thAt

the FCC limits your CB antenna height. If possible, find a moanting place close to your

set, where the antenna wire can take a short, vertical drop on the outsiae of the h.ouse for

entry through a wall or window near the set. Your dealer carries a compl~te line of

installation hardware.

07U1B6

~

~

<;290£9-:)

C/)

Zl

Q'

I-

"'

~

I&.

0

W

at'"

cr

101

~

0

~

~-

~

I ..,

I

, l--'-,"'~ J

I

1 ~

I <: I ~ ' !2

~,N ~ .

g 0

I N

'~ ~-

T

~

I

'(II

,

<

f"'" ~I n ~

.;

.

-J

0

N

P)

'"

d

UI

-J 2

< Q

IJ ~ - U~ 1:\ - 0. wl/1

/.;,

~>- UlN

I .6~ <: . \~ 0. 0 '

\~ " Ozw

:Y ~ ~ >

- 0

,"-Z

c:i In l 0 0 OJ 0 I i=

~

I ~ ~ 0

1/1 Oof>~ N -

~ 0

<of>Z

U<

- of>

~w<

U~

w<~

9iUlo.

W

~' ~ ~

~<w

<:

-~Z

~

c:i

0

-"

N

~-I:I%I

~I i~~! ~

I ~,

I

= N

_\1

~

I

'0

,

.;.

...J

0

N

~

.

'I

Ii

~ N-,

Ii)

I

~

- ,

W

Do:

0~U)

.~

~.

- 01 t Q) < I Ii) I N

i

i

~

_,N

~

I

"01

,

1

~~ . tti '.! I

! , ,I 

~ Q - (II ~.

: -'1 I

~ ,,81 ° !0 0

~O.J 0 N' CD

I: I GI -.. I' Ot~ I~ .

- 10 - I-,~ - . - ni N a) 

~ . - ---" .J I' I .

- I I 1

C- . I 1

- ,t- Z I iK '"

Z O~'" '" 'I -.J I:!~ '" u

0 ~-Z Z '--,~; ~~-<

~~O 0 '(..«0",'" I I I~~ O ~~:... i! ! !«~"'! :~~

"wl-~o lo "'I I "" a

III 1 i~ ~ZS ,0 i~a:!-;Oon.. :! IZ,~ '" 0 0.. I ~.. ~ W) on ~ C

c '2: I c z -';:: v 0:% '51 '~"" :.. II. ..J

«"' I ~ 0 -< V "" "" ~ ..:;c 0" m 0 ..

",.J ~ ,ID z z "''« 0 0

'" I~ 10 I ~ VI ~ ~ z !~ '" 5!~iO u~,.. ~ ~

Q~-~ l tz.c~~"'~ '. "...,~z~. ~ Ki... 14 w W C'« t:i.. 10; ,1'%. ~ :i" ~IO,Z I ~ > '" ... ¥1 ,II! '" ... ID '", '" .. ID '" .J 0

!2 «,- ~"" ~ ! ~ '" ,0'" C W Z ~ C

ZZ 11-1"'1""°-' '" 1"'08.J""Z~~.J-"" ... W;L' Ut"I.J"" ..,m ~.. ,..., CO"" I- >- ,oJ Z

~YI"

l w l "'I 'C I. ' ~ '1'~ I~ :f.G """"'20..."

~ID~ ~C O~ z v , . -~"~,,

..OtZ I_O~~ «z 1...0!..I~"1 ",~wi;c" '" """ 10 - 0 0 -' U ~ , .. '" oJ -' % a '" 02,0. 0 :;I'"

m '..I KI "'.. I- C ..I oJl. 0"'", U 1 % am

a ~I'-'~""O ...o~io I .~UZ",a'~'"

... ~.J C ~ m 2 :1... ~ I'" ~IZ z: ~ ~o,o ~ a

U

z Z ~ 1 ~. - i .. 1 .. ,.,I ~ z ... 5, ... ," .. f; "' '" - ~ ~.. '" £ ~... ~ J Z U z- ,.

~ ~ :!! ~ 818 ~ K ~ ~ e l~ o:~ c'~ ~ ~':!~ii ~ ~ ~

~ >JoIlaa;a". ",¥I",.,~"'!.I, '11-1- ..

Q 0 ~ I ,;j v'I-' 2: ~ I~ I~ "'.J la:i.J ~

Iii

~

1~1 "i'-:\ ... . I -1"

...JI '... I 1""" I '

...J ~I ! i i

0 ! 0 ~ ", i ~ I - 0, - OlIn,

N I') 1')1 - 'N"..;:

~ i iii i~ ~ i~;I'):

z

-'

{/)

z

0

~

~

{/)

Q.

0

~

Q

~

Z

~

{/)

-~

""

"'"

,

\

.I

-! .'.

~ PLAN

NbTE: J¥'Fm Y.9R/R4LFJ",wIC~y...b/AI.RODF HAlO orNER /AlST~~~Hr/ON~ /r.r#.9"" 8£

r.HE CarmMER:r OR /"'J"r~~~E.e:r .eEJ" wS/8/Urr /Dp.eOY/L)£ sr.elKrU,R-"'LO'

-"'PEfX/~ff .ruA&t:JR/S FD.e P/E.e ., -",HCAOR mNNL'r-r~ //" ..H'-",y ,,9LJ"O BE NECE.£r-"'RY

FOR ;NE cp.rrOMER ae /NJ"r-"'LLER ;£7 SECURE ;NE J"ERYKE Or-'" .eOC-"'£ E7V6"/NE£R

TO O£IYRM/N£ .rK-"'.r /NS;-"'LL~r/ON CQM-",L,I£.r W/;N "OC~.e 8U/£.o/~ COOE.J:

-L S'lC S~D N~ll~W J'TV8

8H 2SC rOWER

,

."..' D'.. M.".. "~~

~i I

.

~-:---~ ~.

. .~'~4. T' ~.I !

! I I ~

., ""AI Q"f f.trr

,,-.$ '~6~~~)

a'l"; ..a. a. ~a.. T...~. :I.~ }d

'I."

E.I..&.VA,\ON

,.It." 'H I

.'~.4 T~;Lr j

BASI. PLATt.

...

MOOLL Z9Tow..

DR~WI"G -

SHEET 0.2071 April I, 1983

(Rep1~ces 0-1739)

125 TOWER

PART NUMBER

25G 10' tower section

, 20BG 3' top section for use as hCl11e TV top section

25AG g' top section for use as hCl11e TV top section

/ ST25AG-7 5' short top section for use as hCl11e TV top section

/25AG1 / Top section for use with cl)IInunication antenna. Mast support tube is 1-1/4" ga1v.

pipe, threaded on toP and projecting 12" above apex of .s1de rails.

25AG2 Top section for use with cl)IInunication antenna. Mast support tube is 2-1/4" O.D.

tubing, 36" total length, extending 18" above apex of side rails.

25AG3 Top section for use with coomunicat1on antenna. Mast support tube is 2-1/4" 0.0.

tubing, extending 12" above apex of side rails. A 2" 0.0. antenna stub will

fit snugly inside support tube.

B' top section for use with coomunication antenna. Upper end terminates in 11" d1a.

flat, circular plate with 2-1/4" d1a. hole in center.

Top section for use with coomunication antenna. Mast support tube is 2-3/4" O.D.

and 2~9/168 I.D. tubing, 18" total length.

la' tapered base section

10' insulator section for 25G tower (includes three 110470 post insulators)

la' anti.c1imb section (for #25 and 120 towers)

3 anti-climb metal sheets for attaching to tower section

Joint bolt kit

Beacon plate

3'4" short base section for concrete

3'4" hinged short base section for concrete

Single drive base

Concrete base plate

Concrete base plate

Pier pin (for BPC20G, BPC25G, or 25TG - one required)

Hinged base plate for concrete

Concrete base bolt with double nuts (for BPH2SG - four required)

Flat Peak roof mount 0-. ~

roof mount - - - - -0. ,0. -. ..-, -oc--:.

Base plate (for use with drive rods)

2' drive rods (set of 3)

Drive tool

Rotor post

Rotor post

Accessory shelf. Triangular plate for mounting Ham .M" rotor or mast bearing.

Mounts inside of tower. When using Model 400 Rotor, plate must be redri11ed.

Guy assembly (bracket with torque bars)

Guy bracket only 0 Adjustable house bracket (0 to lS8) .

Adjustable house bracket (0 to 24")

Adjustable house bracket (0 to 36")

Universal house bracket (68 to 30.)

Eave bracket (universal)

Tower bushing for 25AG and ST25AG tops (1.1/48 I.D. X 2" O.D.)

Tower bushing for 25AG and ST25AG tops (1-1/2. I.D. x 2. O.D.)

Amateur bearing for use with 2SAG4 top (28 X 48 X 10. hardware)

Heavy duty thrust bearing, recoomended for 28 O.D. tubing

Heavy duty thrust bearing, recoomended for 38 O.D. tubing

Bearing/accessory shelf section for mounting AS, TB3, or TB4 bearing and rotor

Side arm mount for UHF and FM antennas

Side ann assembly, 2.1/2' to 3' extension. with 2.1/4" D.D. support tube

Discontinued (Replaced by SA253UA)

Discontinued (Replaced by SA253UA)

67" side arm with 1~1/4" 1.0. support tube for mounting TV receiving antenna

(not recl)llnended and must be guyed to resist twist)

Torque arm stabilizer ass~b1y

Top dish IJIount w/2" 0.0. ma5t (extends 2' above top plate)

Top dish mount w/2" standard pipe (extends 3' above top plate)

Top dish mount w/28 EH pipe (extends 3' above top plate)

Top dish mount w/2-1/2" standard pipe (extends 3' above top plate)

Face dish mount w/2. (2-3/8" 0.0.) 5' long standard pipe

--~ Work platform (for 125 and 120 towers)

SR245 Safety ring

EF2S4S Aluminum erection fixture. 12' long (fits all models with 1-1/4" side rails)

(use to raise one 10' section at a time)

P2545 Pole only for EF2545

H2545 Head only for EF2545

*Towers mounted on these bases must be bracketed or guyed.

*-Thls Iten is not to be u$ed without proper design consideration.

Available bv soecia1 order on1v. Allow 60 davsfor dellVery:/

The 120 tower is not recoomended for CQlmerc1al, ham, CB or guyed Installations.

NOTE: The price on 125 sections will be higher on shipments to the following states: "",~:-,~, -~

r:ororado, Idaho. Montana, Nevada, New MexiCoo, Oregon, Utah, Washington, and WYCl111ng.

Refer to a1 habetica1/nlll1erical rice list for current rices.

F.O.B. PEORIA. ILLINOIS ~ or ~ BIRMINGH~, ALABAMA. SPECIfICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHUUT NOTICE

~

40

8-1/2

31

18

31

31

31

25AG4

/ 25AG5 /

25TG

*25RG

25ACL

Li~~~

APL25G

SB25G

*SBH25G

*SDB25G

*BPC20G

*BPC25G

3/4X12PP

*BPH25G

1/2X12BB

*FR25G *PR25G --

*BP25G

*DR25G

UT25

RP25G

RP25GCM

AS2SG

GA25G

GB25G

HB25AG

HB25BG

HB25CG

HBU

EB2525G

TBSO

T875

AS

TB3

1B4

BAS25G

UHF25G

SA253UA

SAB25G2

SA25G224

SA25G67

60

74

115

65

1/2

14

10

14

20

13

27

1

21

1/2

2414 -,

7

6

1

3

2

4

10

6

8

11

17

15

7

1/2

1/Z

1

2-1/2

3

18

4

28

15

22

25

35

40

50

60

65

42

10

8

18

10

8

~

Arizona. California,

March 1, 1986 PARTS LIST p-453

(Replaces P-42l)

Zone wAw Wind Load

6 Sq. Ft. of Allowable Load

BPC25G

with

3/48x128

PP

T.B.

3/8.X6.

E&E

APL25G

and

SA253UA

GAC

253 -

3

GAC

255

C. C.M.

3/168

TH.

1/4-

Tower

Heiaht uGA25G

2

25G 25AG2

36 12 6

40' 1 1

SO'

..§.9.:..

~

80'

90'

3

4

3

3

36 Q

"'I

2 6 1

36 6

36

54

1 2

1

5

6

7

~

6

9

9

1

3 18 3

1

1

3

54 1!

18

3

3

1 1

54

72

i 100' I 1

:'"~~ I

120'

130'

140'

150'

160'

170'

180'

190' I

200'

- ~

_li

12

11:.

12

3

3

4 24

4

-L

9

-1..Q.-- 1

1 72

72

24 1

3

3

G.W.

3/168

E.H.S.

300'

375'

450'

500'

825'

900'

1100'

1500'

-~~~~

=ill~ i

1850' i

- ,

2500'

I

2575'

2775'

2875'

3100'

3275'

24

24

1.Q..

30

4

I

i 4

12

11

14

1

1 1 72

-L

3

90 I

90

1

M.

15

16 1 1 5

3 _30 -

36

~

~

.108

5

6

6

17 1

18

---

19

6 ~

18

1 1

6

6

~

36

1~

1 1 6 108 18 20

Items shown above are necessary for complete .ground. guyed towers

For .roof. towers a flat roof mount (FR25G) is substituted for the concrete base plate

(BPC25G) and wall anchors (GAWP25) are substituted for the concrete anchors (GAC25).

When ordering specify 8roof8 or 8ground8.

Anchor grounding (AGKE) and base grounding (BGKE), as recommended by EIA, are incluoed

in tower material. However, extra copper wire may be requireo for roof installations~

see appropriate sheet for grounding material and order extra copper wire as a separate

item.

All types of antenna installations should be thoroughly inspected by qualified

personnel and remarked with hazard and warning labels at least twice a year to insure

safety and proper performance.

March 1, 1986 PARTS LIST P-454

(Replaces P-422)

-

PARTS LIST #25G GUYED TOWER

""'R.-

Zone -8- Wind Load

6 Sq. Ft. of Allowable Load

BPC25G

with

3/48x128

PP

APL25G

and !

_SA253UA

G.W.

3/16-

E.H.S.

300'

375'

I

__500 '

725'

825'

900'

1325'

1500'

1600'

2125'

- ~~75'

2500 '-

~_600 '

2775'

T.B.

3/S8x68 GAC GAC

E&E 253 255

C.C.M.

_3/16-

36_-

TH.

1/4-

,-

, 12

,1 2

Tower

Height

40'

GA25G I -

~

3

25AG2

-

6

-

12

_18

18

18

24

24

~ .

"'0

~A

- -

-

3 54

~ .

-

-

72 12

72

.",

-

30

3_Q30

-

~

-

12

_90 I 15

90 15 I

90 15 -

-1°8 18

108 36 18

- 2815' ,108 - 36 . 18 -, ,

50'

60' I

70' i

80'

90'

100'

110' ,~

120' :.1L

130' -1L

140' ~

150'_~

160'J:"L

170' I.JL...

- ""'V.I.". 180' 18 , - ,

Items shown above are necessary for complete -ground- guyed towers

For 8roof8 towers a flat roof mount (FR2SG) is substituted for the concrete base plate

(BPC25G) and wall anchors (GAWP25) are substituted for the concrete anchors (GAC25).

When ordering specify -roof- or -ground-.

Anchor grounding (AGKE) and base grounding (BGKE), as recommended by EIA, are included

in tower material. However, extra copper wire may be required for roof installations.

see appropriate sheet for grounding material and order extra copper wire as a separate

item.

All types of antenna installations should be thoroughly inBp@ct@d by qualified

personnel and remarked with hazard and warning labels at l@'ast twice a year to insure

safety and proper performance.

PARTS LIST P-455 March 1, 1986

(Replaces P-338)

~ PARTS LIST #25G GUYED TOWER

Zone 'c' Wind Load

6 Sq. Ft. of Allowable Loao

~~ < BPC25G with: 

~ 3/4;~12.

T.B.

3/S8x68

E&E

6

G.W.

3/168

EHS

300'

G.W. i

1/4.1

I

EHS I

I

T.B.

1/2.x12. GAC GAC

E&E 253 255

C.C.M.

3/16.

')c

C.C.M.

1/48

TH.

-1L!:

12

12

Tower

_Hei9.b~

40'

25G ~~

3 . . -

375' ! SO' I _36

60'

70'

- 2

~

18

24

24

-1-L

-1Qj

30 i

--j

36 i

~

625' :

725'

1075'

1175'

54

54

- -

6

72

- 72 12 -

1325' n 12 -

1775'

2000_~

.l.!~?_'

~illQ.:J

90

90

108

108

-

-

15

15 '

--- I

-_!L~

18 I -

~

6 3fi

Items shown above are necessary for complete -ground- guyed towers.

For 8roof8 towers a flat roof mount (FR25G) is substituted for the concrete base plate

(BPC25G) and wall anchors (GAWP25) are substituted for the concrete anchors (GAC25).

When ordering specify -roof- or -groundAnchor grounding (AGKE) ana base grounding (SGKE), as recommenced by EIA, are included

in tower material. However, extra copper wire may be required for roof installations.

See appropriate sheet for grounding material and order extra copper wire as a separate

item.

All types ot antenna installations should be thoroughly in8pcetcd by qualified personnel

and remarked with hazard and warning labels at least twice a yeAr to insure safety and

proper performance.

JANUARY 1991 197 NGWLMS ILSP

E.12 METEROLOGICAL TOWERS

E.12.2 FIBERGLASS POLE
JANUARY 1991 198 NGWLMS ILSP
Wood roll. Concrete Cr8Cks beaUty for generations. is

and crumbles. Sleel ru51S aJKI can competitively priced and even

be an unyielding~. Alumi. affords substantial saving on

num oxidizes and Cvuuiie$. initial installation COSIS due to

Twenty years ago, recognizing li~ht weiihL

the Shakespeare Company u die The possibilities are endless

leader in fiberglass innovatioo, a growing u pro~sive IIChite

major utility company approached tural finns, consulting enlinee

Shake~ in seareh of. and utilities nationwide conlin

composite Ii&ht pole that would to specify fibefilass for:

survive the hostile riJOl'l of Shopping Celllers

coutal salt air environmems. The HospitGls

resul~ successful research and Roadways

development program not only ChemicGl P1GIUS

answered the immediate need, but Airports

wu destined to completely R~sidelltiaJ

revolutionize the entire liabting Mullicipo-lilies

standard indUSboy. COGStal E,,"ironMeIllS

Now, after tWo decades, WQSt~/WGter TreGtmelll Pk

literally thousands upon thousands Parking Lots

of Shakespeare fibefilass poles AUlO D~aJ~rslaips

enhance the landscape ftom coast IndustriGl Parks

to coast in every conceivable Sports CompleMs

application. The reuons are RestaurGIIIS

simple. Fiberrlus answers the CondomillilUllS

inherent problems of all other pole AlrUlSement Parks

materials. It is impervious to the Resorts 8

elemenlS, will relain ilS lustrous

Non-Conduclit'l

Advantage.Reduces hazard

What are the prima". accidental electrocutD due

d ' shoned wirins.

a vantages. .\'on.Conosit'l

Lig/ll ill Weirht Advantage-No above or bel

Advantage-Labor.ime,...s ground line deterioration in

equipment savings in installa_. soil or salt air climates.

Main'~nance Fne Rigid in Cold C/i"..,eJ

Advantage-No rust. corrosiIXS. or Advantage.Actually stnxtll

decay means no repaintinl. sub-zero temperatures.

Calor/art Lo.e.'iIJ

Advantage. The color is im~. Advantaae.over time.

naled throughouthe wall of die Shakespearc'Fiberglw C~

pole. Liaht Poles will outlast wo

Price Grid A vailabUlq aluminum. steel. am COIEII

Advantage-Price and delivery under the same climatic cir

competitive with other materials. stances.

Special orderI Ire no problem. R~sults

Dljllcnon Capabiu" Greater versatility. beauty I

Advantage-Enginee~ 10 owner satisfaction coupled

withstand winds of 130 MPH with much lower unit COSIS over

minimum deOeCli(XL lifetime of Ihc pole. .
c

~e~e\\

.

i

r

!

!

I

';JPackaging

1. Each pole shall be

individually spiral wrapped with

cushioned paper and overwrapped

with plastic shrink film for

protection during shipping and

storage. The wrapping shall

incorporate a lip string running

the entire length for ease in

removing the wrapping. K

- "a.tO,,~e oat" P

Sample Fiberglass Light

Pole Specification

1. Fiberglass lighting poles

shall be Shakespeare Company

design.

2. Wind loading shall be

calculated for 100 mph wind

plus a 30% gust factor with

AASHTO standard specification

for structural suppons for highway

signs. luminaries, and traffic

signals.

3. Effective projected area

(EPA) is the actual area adjusted

with the appropriate drag

coefficient (shape factor) to result

in an equivalent area having a drag

coefficient equal to one (1.0).

\c

S\\"et

Consistent Quality

in Every Step

At every stage of manufacture.

the Shakespeare Fiberglass Light

Pole is carefully inspected for

structural integrity and visual

appearance. Laboratory tests are

continually performed for surface

durability, weather resistance, and

internal continuity. Additionally,

a rigorous quality control program

incl.udi~g random d~flection I

testing Insures maxunum ,

performance under wind loading.

The finished poles are individually spiral wrapped with cushioned

paper and overwrapped with

plastic shrink film for protection

during shipping. handling and onsite delivery. L

3. The laminate (resin) shall

be pigmented the same color

as the final coating. The pole

color shall be unifonn throughout

the entire wall thickness of the

pole. A highly weather resistant

pigmented polyurethane coating

shall be applied to the pole. The

coating thickness shall have

. .

mml mm dry fi l lm thickness of U

11/2 mils.

4. The pole shall be flame

resistant in accordance with

ASTM D635.

5. Where applicable, the pole

shall be delivered predrilled to

accommodate the specified lighting fixture (s) or mast anns (s).

6. Tenons, where applicable,

shall be epo~y bonded to the

fiberglass shaft and shall be steel

hot dipped galvanized to ASTM

Al53 or shall be 6061- T6 or

A356- T6 aluminum.

7. The handhole shall be

21/2" x S" with an oval A319 cast

aluminum cover secured with a

vandal resistant stainless steel 1/4"

socket head screw.

S, Anchor base poles shall be

delivered with heavy duty A356-

T6 aluminum base casting, which

shall be epoxy bonded to the

outside of the fiberglass shaft.

9, Anchor bolts shall confonn

to ASTM A307 with threaded end,

hex nuts, and flat washers (two per

bolt) each galvanized to ASTM

A153. A bolt hole template shall

be furnished with the anchor bolts.

6tO-..lt\

M alerials

1. The pole shall be constructed by the filament winding

process from thennosetting

polyester resin and containing a

minimum of 65% "E" type

fiberglass by weight. The ultraviolet resistant resin shall contain

no clay fillers. The filament

winding })rocess shall be. continuously applied with unifonn tension

and the winding will be. placed on

the pole helically at low angles to

provide axial strength. Additional

windings shall be placed on the

pole in a circular manner to

provide compressive strength.

2. The surface of the pole will

be (smooth or natural) finish and

unifonn the entire length

~~\\e of the pole.

or replace does not include any

obligation to reimburse the

purchaser for expenses of transportation, installation, removal, or

other expenses which may be

Incurred. In no clle Ihall

Shakespeare be liable for conse.

quential. special or indirect damages resulting from breach of this

warranty. .

3-Year Limited

Light Pole Warranry

Shakospoaro warrants this

product to br; frce of defects in

materials and workmanship for

I period of WH (3) )'Iln from

the date of purc:hase when used

under normal conditions. Correction of any defect by either

repair or replacement at the

Gfeen

option of Shakespeare, constitUtes

fulfillment of the Seller's

obligation undGr this WarTanty and

,"onSlilUICS the Purt:haser's sole

remedy.

Snakcspcarc makes no olnl'

express or implied warranty of

fitness or merchanlability or any

other express or Implied warranty.

Shakespeare's obligation to repair

\
p p

10'

thru

40'

10'

thru

47'

NUT COVERS

..

,

,

Beautifully lightweight and

durable...the standard of

excellence.

Using the unique Shakespeare

process. thousands of resin

impregnated fiberglass filamentS

are wound spirally and helically

on a spinning mandrel. These

special windings insure the extra

strength necessary for generations

of dependable service.

The color is impregnated

throughout the pole wall by

pigmented polyester resin utilized

during construction. A specially

fonnulated heavy polyurethane

coating with ultraviolet inhibitors

finishes and beautifies the pole

while adding increased protection

against the environment.

"

-.

SHROUD

0

A: Poles are delivered prcdrilled

for boll-on side mounl fixture (s).

Shakespeare only needs to know

manufacturer and model number - we will take care of the

rest. The fixrures attach exactly

as they do 10 metal poles.

B: For roadway lighting and applications requiring mas Iarms ~

Shakespeare manufactures a full

line of mast anns in lengths of 4

to IS feel. Poles are predrilled at

the faclory for ease of installation.

d~~

ROUND TAPERED

ANCHOR BASE

ROUND TAPERED

DIRECT BURIAL

I Flared base increases

stability and resists rotating

I Conductor entrance standard

2' below the ground line (rubber

grommcted to protect conductor

Illinlt dlmlll).

Anchor Base Pole Features

I A356. T6 Aluminum base

casting is epoxy bonded to the

fiberglass shaft and polyurethane

coated to match pole color

I Fiberglass shrouds or nut

covefS optional

I Hot dipped galvanized steel

anchor bolts complete with nuts

(2) and washers (2) are standard

(S/8" x 24", I" x 34" or I 1/4" x

42" depending on pole specified)

Direct Burial Pole Features

. Substantially reduces installation cost and improves ground

linc appearance (I!tility companies

have been doing It for decades)

. Shakespeare fiberglass

doesn't niSI, corrode, rot, or decay

in the ground... which means:

1. Less installation labor

2. No concrete foundations or

anchor bolts

3. No special below-ground

pol~ treatments

Tapered for appearance as well

as for function, the Shakespeare

Fiberglass Light Pole is lightweight, easily handled and

installed, yet tough enough to

withstand high wind, corrosive

elements, extreme temperatures,

and incidental impact..

Features

I Available in lengths from 8'

t047'

I Natural or smooth finish

I Seven Colors - each

integrated into the resin throughout the pole wall

I Finished with highly UV

and weather-resistant pigmented

polyurcth:lnc coating

I Tenon and mast ann construction

C: All tenom arc 606I-T6

aluminum or hot dipped galvanized steel and arc available in all

standard sizes. Post top fiXtures,

flood lights. or bullhorns mount

with ease.

D: 2 1/2" x 5" handholcs arc

standard. 2 1/2" round or 4" x 6ft

available (most models). Handhole covers are coated to match

the pole color, .
Handhole Covers

are cast aluminum. 2 1(2" x 5"

handholes are stal¥1ald. 2 1(2"

round and 4.'x 6" are available

(most mOOels). 4" x Ir' are

either ~ or available

dependinl on pole size.

Handhole covers are C'~ to

match the pole-color. ~

~...".--c-._, .~ Anchor Ba.s~ Mounts

are heavy A3S6- T6 cut

aluminum and are pe~nrJy

bonded to the pole for a 'trona.

secure installation. AncOOr

base template available with

order..

Mast Ann'

in lengths of 4' to 1~' and

Simplex-type arm fittincs 8R

available. .

:::

L... -

FlIued Bares

(direct burial) resists rotation

and pull-out while impervious

fiberglass construction

eliminates comJSion. .

TenD...

are galvanized steel or

aluminum and provide

secure, snul fits for stalxiard

luminaries and tenon-type

brackets. Size 2 3/8", 3", or

4". Cast aluminum pole ~

are standard for side mount

installations whe~ tenons

are not requiRd. .

Tertured (Natural)

Finish'

Smooth FinLsi
cS'~~~-4.-te8 AVAILABLE

OPTIONS

ANCHOR

BASE SHROUDS

MATERIAL: FIBERGlASS REINFORCED

POLYESTER

DESIGN ONE PIECE

CATALOG ORDER NUMBERS:

FOR

CATALOG

NUMBER

ANCHOR -NUMBER DESIGNATES COLOR OF SHROUD

BASE

BHC

PART

NUMBER DARK

BRONZE

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

-5

BLACK GRAY BROWN GREEN SILVER WHITE

-7

-7

-7

-7

-7

-7

-7

-7

-7

-7

AS10-14. AO10

AS15.20. AO12.16

AS21-25. AO1S-25

ALL AS AND AH 27-35

AH20-25

AA25. AB25

AB30-AD30

AB35-AD35

AA40-AD47

ALL AO POLES

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3

-3

-4

-4

-4

-4

-4

-4

-4

-4

-4

-4

-6

~6

-6

-6

-6

-6

-6

-6

-6

-6

7V2-8'/2"

8-9"

9-10"

11.12"

11-12"

13'/2.14'/2~

14-15"

14'h.15'/2~

15-16"

8"

OPSH.1017

OPSH.1821

OPSH.2225

OPSH.2735

OPSH-2025

OPSH.2425

OPSH.2930

OPSH-3435

OPSH-4047

OPSH.AO

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-2

-2

-2

-2

-2

-2

-2

-2

-2

-2

EACH CATALOG NUMBER REFE'RS 10 A COMPLETE SET OF ONE SHROUD WITH TWO TAMPER RESISTANT STAINLESS STEEL SCREWS (FOR ATTACHEMENT

OF SHROUD 10 ANCHOR aA.SE),

BOLT COVERS

MATERIAL: CAgr ALUMINUM

FITS ALL 27-35 FOOT ANCHOR BASE POLES

FITS AH2O-AH25 ANCHOR BASE POLES

FITS M40.AD45 SERIES POLES

CATALOG ORDER NUMBER: OPNC-2735

OPNG-2025

OPNC-4045

CATALOG NUMBER REFERS 10 A COMPLETE SET OF FOUR COIERS WITH ONE

STAINLESSTEEL SCREW (FOP. ATTACHMENT OF COVER 10 ANCHOR BASE) PER COVER.

ANCHOR BOLTS

MATERIAL: LON CARBON STEEL PER ASTM A-307

FINISH: HOT DIP GALVANIZED PER ASTM A-153

CATALOG ORDER NUMBERS:

A

A B c p BOL15 10 BE USED WITH

B

OPAB-1025 %-11 UNC 21" 3" 3" 10.25' AS. AD. AQ, AT" ATH SERIES

4'

4"

5'

0 DaD rfW"- 2Q35 1-8 UNC 30" 4" ~R-SEAIES

'l1~' AL . AS SEAlES

,

p

0 '0 '

, ~c~

~~

M4O ro AD47 OPAB-2547 1V..7 UNC 36" 6"

EACH CATALOG NUMBER REFERS TO A COMPLETE SET OF FOUR ANCHOR BOLTS WITH

TWO GALVANIZED HEX NUTS AND ~ GALVANIZ!D FLAT WASHERS PER BOLT.

C)1M8 TN ~ Co
COUNTER8A~ANCED TILTING ALUMINUM FLAGPOLES

Counterbalanced tilting aluminum ftagpoles ere cone tapered . supplied

with standard fittings and have an anchor bolt mounting system. Thi8

design provides the owner with a counterbalanced poie that can be

lowered by two people. This reduces maintenance costa of servicing

ropes and accessories. These poles are generally groundset but are

suitable for roof top installations in the smaller sizes. Pole. are readily

available in heights up to 60 feeL A yardarm option Is available.

COUNTERBALANCED SYSTEM:

:OUNTERBALANCED BOX SYSTEM

STYLE PT-B

-..~~il~i::";" ,... I

TIIIII

.. -

... PllllIIa A.c-..

..

5 13% I 20".20". ~.l ~ w-, 80 -

117

153 ~

210

235

.so

-

~

135

-m-

,-

25

~

36

'40

..

50

iO

. J 3v. I 2O..20._.~1 ,

7 13~ I 2'..2'..~. 1 , ,

. J 3~_1 2.-.2.- --:1 ,

. '~~"J~.~.x.. ,. x.. -

~ ~I~.I30 I '~.x".1 31'

~~ . M ~~ -----~ 

--~~

- ~

A i I:: I ~~

--- 'I I! II i ._~

.. .

--- I I 1'1 ,...~ .

~- --'--;:-'. -:-"-;-.~~'.. 

. - ~~;~~~~(- ~ - ~

... c - - -

~

COUNTERBALANCED POLE SYSTEM

STYLE PT.P -0 I :

~-~

J,.,.

~

..I_,o_I . I 31-.31-.'- I ""-."-I_~__I__~

t4

. ~M

~-

-- ~ ._~

- ..~ 10-

-.., of polo - ,.. -

i

!

"

-. -.,.."",~ ~ ~ - =

'- ~~,-~~~; ~
The following test results were accumulated to determine load bearing and deflection characteristics.

Results of test:

Sample #1 Sample #2

LOAD 

..",.~ 

IN 

... 18S. ..~". DEFLECTION IN-INCHES DEFLECTION IN INCHES

0 0 0

50 4-3/4 4.5/8

100 10.3/8 10-3/8

150 15-1/4 14.5/8

200 21-1/8 19.3/8

250 25-3/4 24-3/8

300 31 30-3/4

~ole weight:

123 Ibs. ea,

me.er

. 182 TfW eo
~ DIAMETE~ j 1=:- RECOMM~NDED ;urAL L~DING ~

.

STANDARD

NOMINA, HANDI()LE BOLT CATALOG

I/OUNTING SHAFT SHAFT SHAFT LOCATION III/PIt go I/~H 100 I/~H 120 I/PH HOLE NUI/BER

HEIG~ LENGTH WEIGHT TOP !A.5E FROII !A.5E WEIGHT EPA' E" . E~A .EPA' CIRCLE

1FT I IFi I ILBS I fiN I fiN I IIN I ILBS IISO Fi I ISO Fi I ISO FT I SO FT I I

STANDARD POLE CONSTRUCTION (AS) ~ 10 I 25 I 2.9 I 4 ~ I 18 . 150 16.3

~ 12 I 29 I 2.9 I 4.9 18 150 T13:s 10.3

14 32 2.9 150 9.8 56 3.6 -e:: AS14"

,

3.1

89

1.8 8';'" , A:C:

111;'

25"-' 25 59 2.9

_20..

,~20-

I 2S

r-25

6.8

18 200 9.6 7.3 5.7 j 34 11'/2"

301~()19()144 83 18 1.9 ifA 1 "Ih' ,~

L30 -

AS30

AH30 SHAFT

I AB.10 LENGTH

*"

~W30 -I 30 122

-0 30 I ;~ 161 I ij:~ 4.8-

30 30 200 6.4

30 30 232 6.6 10.5 18 300 28.7 22.4 174 11.0 14'/2" I AC30

30

"3S"-

3-~ "1

AD35

40 ~ 190 62 11.7

1ii

~

45 211 6.2 11.7 18 300 3.9 15'/2" ! AMS9.1

15.2

21.2

22

6.2

10.9

154

100

300

300

.6

3.8

7.6

"i'i:2"

45 .6 ~ AB45 I

45

45

45

45

4~

293 64 11.8 18

18

--;s

3:2r;5ih" 1~1

i 5,7 I 15'/2" I AD45 I

341 I 6~6~r-;;:9

430 I 6.9 I 12.0

18" STO

.. Do Not Un For Side Moun! Applications - Use 80 Series

.. DO NOT USE WITH TENON MOUNTED ARMS OR FOR MULTIPLE FIXTURE APPLICATIONS - USE 80 SERIES

HAND HOLE Standard 2'/2" x 5"

~tlonal 2'/2" Round, or 4" x 6" or 4" x 12" on Some Models

TENONS 2%",3", or 4" on Some Models

All poles are polyurethane coated and individually wrapped Anchor bolla 8I8ndIrd.

Bolt covers and base shrouds optional. . . see accessories.

. EPA ratings for capped pole are lime IS for tenon pole

. EPA recommendations are calculated per MSHTO Standards and include a 3CN gust factor S.e Catalog Sheet 01-4 for bale dlmenllons.

".2..
MAXIMUM EXPECTED WIND VELOCITIES

80 YEAR MUM MC&MRE.c. 1M"'>

The basis for selecting light poles from the catalog is velocities include a gust factor of 1.3 which resuh in a pole

the weight and effective projected area (EPA) data shown in designed for winds considerably greater than the isotach

the pole tabulations under the headings "Recommended value.

Total Loading" or for the poles with mast arms "R~m- Wind loading for Shakespeare light poles are calculated

mended Maximum Size of Lu~inaire". in accordan~ with the AASHTO Standard Specification for

The wind velocities r~rded on the map illustrated Structural Supports for Highway Signs, Luminaires & Traffic

below are isotach values, not gust values. The design Signals.

-0-;;;-

~-

.~v--

~

,~-

-.-

- \ ~-_:::.__:~ - .-..,

~

"-t-

:=..'\ .:_~ --.

~---~ ~

~ 1- l...~

f -. ..- -- ,"""- ,f + J 1 - ~~_ '

rv

I '... I

~

0;.-""

."- /,

-..

~

- -,. - e-;

70_'

D~-,

-~-

.'00_'

_110_'

MPHI ..1 - - 50 ,... me.. ..e."en~~

MAXIMUM EX PEtTED WIND \'ELOtITIE~

I~ THE UNITED STATES

. - - - - ---

GUST

VELocmes I

78 I

87

98

ISOTACHS

OF EXTREME MILE

AT 30 FEET

ABOVE GROUND

ISOTACH

VALUES

60

67

7S

ISOTACH

VALUES

80

85

90

95

GUST

VELocmes

104 I

111

117

124

ISOTACH

VALUES

100

110

120

GUST

VELOCmES

1~

143

156

For additional information or Repr.-ntatiw nea-rBS~. call:

.. ,... (100) 7710

(803) 276-5504 (In South Carolina)

FAX: ~) 276-8940

cS' ~.djG ~... '

ELEC1'RONICS AND FIBERGlASS DIVISION

PO. &c. Tn. Nwbeny, OC 2t1~ 068

JANUARY 1991 213 NGWLMS ILSP

! Verify the NGWLMS Site Report information and update as required. Report

sensor calibration information on the NGWLMS Sensor Test Worksheet.